WO2015030100A1 - Image display device, and head-mounted display - Google Patents

Image display device, and head-mounted display Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2015030100A1
WO2015030100A1 PCT/JP2014/072544 JP2014072544W WO2015030100A1 WO 2015030100 A1 WO2015030100 A1 WO 2015030100A1 JP 2014072544 W JP2014072544 W JP 2014072544W WO 2015030100 A1 WO2015030100 A1 WO 2015030100A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
housing
image
lens unit
unit
display device
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2014/072544
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
美佑紀 楠田
信郎 開
Original Assignee
ブラザー工業株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2013179762A external-priority patent/JP6032159B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2014154957A external-priority patent/JP6248854B2/en
Application filed by ブラザー工業株式会社 filed Critical ブラザー工業株式会社
Publication of WO2015030100A1 publication Critical patent/WO2015030100A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B27/00Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
    • G02B27/01Head-up displays
    • G02B27/017Head mounted
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B27/00Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
    • G02B27/01Head-up displays
    • G02B27/017Head mounted
    • G02B27/0176Head mounted characterised by mechanical features
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B27/00Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
    • G02B27/01Head-up displays
    • G02B27/0179Display position adjusting means not related to the information to be displayed
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B27/00Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
    • G02B27/01Head-up displays
    • G02B27/0149Head-up displays characterised by mechanical features
    • G02B2027/015Head-up displays characterised by mechanical features involving arrangement aiming to get less bulky devices
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B27/00Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
    • G02B27/01Head-up displays
    • G02B27/017Head mounted
    • G02B2027/0178Eyeglass type
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B27/00Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
    • G02B27/01Head-up displays
    • G02B27/0179Display position adjusting means not related to the information to be displayed
    • G02B2027/0181Adaptation to the pilot/driver

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to an image display device and a head-mounted display using the image display device.
  • an image display device capable of performing focus adjustment is known.
  • the image display device is, for example, a head mounted display (hereinafter referred to as “HMD”).
  • HMD head mounted display
  • a monocular HMD that presents an image to one eye of a user is known.
  • image light the optical axis of image light (hereinafter referred to as “image light”) displayed on the liquid crystal in the casing is in the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the casing (hereinafter referred to as “left-right direction”). Extend.
  • the image light is bent backward by the half mirror and is incident on one eye of the user.
  • the HMD includes an adjuster for performing focus adjustment.
  • the adjuster is ring-shaped and can be rotated with the optical axis as a fulcrum.
  • a liquid crystal holder for holding the liquid crystal is disposed inside the adjuster.
  • the engaging portion that protrudes inward from the inner peripheral surface of the adjuster is fitted into a groove cam provided on the outer peripheral surface of the liquid crystal holder.
  • the liquid crystal holder moves in the left-right direction along the optical axis. In this case, the position of the liquid crystal holder with respect to the lens holder fixed to the housing moves in the left-right direction.
  • the adjuster is provided outside the liquid crystal holder. For this reason, the magnitude
  • the housing is also large in the vertical direction. As a result, there is a problem that the visual field of the user may be blocked by the housing.
  • An object of the present invention is to provide an image display device and a head mounted display capable of adjusting the focus while reducing an increase in the vertical size of the casing.
  • An image unit capable of generating image light
  • a lens unit having a plurality of lenses, disposed on one side in the first direction with respect to the image unit, and having an optical axis extending in the first direction
  • a housing covering at least a part of the image unit and the lens unit; Of the housing, a member provided on the one side in the first direction with respect to the lens unit, wherein the image light guided by the lens unit is secondly orthogonal to the first direction.
  • a deflecting member capable of deflecting to one side of the direction;
  • a first engagement member provided on the one side in the second direction of at least one of the image unit and the lens unit;
  • a second engagement member provided on the other side in the second direction of at least one of the image unit and the lens unit;
  • a member provided on the inner side surface of the one side portion in the second direction, which is engaged with the first engaging member and supported so as to be movable in the first direction.
  • a third engaging member that A second engagement member that engages with the second engagement member, the fourth engagement member being capable of changing a relative distance between the image unit and the lens unit in the first direction;
  • An adjustment mechanism provided on the other side of the second direction of It is an image display device provided with an operation member that is provided at least on the other side in the second direction in the casing and that allows a user to operate the adjustment mechanism.
  • At least one first engagement member of the image unit and the lens unit is provided on one side in the second direction, and the second engagement member is provided on the other side in the second direction.
  • the first engagement member engages with the third engagement member of the housing and is supported so as to be movable in the first direction with respect to the housing.
  • the second engagement member engages with the fourth engagement member of the adjustment mechanism, and moves in the first direction in response to an operation on the operation member.
  • the first engagement member, the second engagement member, the third engagement member, and the fourth engagement which are members for adjusting the focus by changing the relative distance between the image unit and the lens unit.
  • a member is arrange
  • the image display apparatus can suppress the size in the vertical direction while being worn by the user. Therefore, the image display apparatus can reduce the increase in the size of the casing in the vertical direction while allowing the user to adjust the focus.
  • the housing holds a fixed distance between the image unit and the deflection member,
  • the first engaging member and the second engaging member may be provided in the lens unit and may not be provided in the image unit.
  • the lens unit is moved in the first direction by the adjusting mechanism according to the operation on the operation member.
  • the relative distance to the image unit changes and focus adjustment is performed. Since the lens unit does not require external electrical control, a signal line for transmitting an electrical signal is not connected. For this reason, the image display apparatus can smoothly move the lens unit in the left-right direction.
  • the first engagement member may have a first protrusion that protrudes toward the one side in the second direction.
  • the first engagement member and the third engagement member can appropriately suppress the housing from becoming larger in the third direction. Therefore, the image display apparatus can appropriately move the image unit or the lens unit in the first direction.
  • the length of the first protrusion in the first direction may be longer than the length of the third direction orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction.
  • the image display device can prevent the image unit or the lens unit from rotating about the axis extending in the second direction when the operation member is operated. Therefore, the image display apparatus can appropriately perform focus adjustment by moving the image unit or the lens unit in the first direction.
  • the third engaging member may have a first groove portion that extends in the first direction and into which the first protruding portion is fitted.
  • the first groove portion can restrict the first protrusion from moving in a direction other than the first direction.
  • the third engagement member may include a shaft member that extends in the first direction and is inserted through the first protrusion. It can restrict
  • the first projecting portion is provided at a position including the center in the third direction among the one side in the second direction of at least one of the image unit and the lens unit
  • the second engagement member is provided at a position including a center in the third direction among the other side in the second direction of at least one of the image unit and the lens unit
  • the third engagement member may be provided at a position including a center in the third direction on an inner surface of the casing at the one side portion in the second direction of the casing.
  • the image display apparatus When the image display device is attached to the user with one side in the third direction up, and when the image display device is attached to the user with the other side in the third direction up
  • the direction of gravity applied to the lens unit changes.
  • the image display apparatus can maintain the image unit and the lens unit horizontally even when the direction of gravity applied to the image unit and the lens unit is changed.
  • the first projecting portion has two sliding portions provided apart from each other in the third direction among the one side of the second direction of at least one of the image unit and the lens unit, Two third engagement members are provided corresponding to the two sliding portions, The third engagement member may be provided at a position including a center in the third direction on an inner surface of the casing at the one side portion in the second direction of the casing.
  • the second engaging member has a second projecting portion projecting to the other side in the second direction of at least one of the image unit and the lens unit,
  • the fourth engagement member may have a spiral second groove portion into which the second protrusion fits.
  • the second engagement member and the fourth engagement member can appropriately suppress the housing from becoming larger in the third direction.
  • the second protrusion along the second groove according to the operation of rotating the operation member, at least one of the image unit and the lens unit is moved in the first direction, and the relative distance between the two is changed. Can be made.
  • the image unit and the lens unit include a first state in which the relative distance in the first direction between the image unit and the lens unit is the closest, and a second state in which the relative distance is the most separated.
  • the lens unit has the optical axis in the overlapping portion of the lens unit disposed on the other side in the first direction with respect to the end on the one side in the first direction of the image unit.
  • At least one third projecting portion projecting in a direction intersecting the optical axis, In the first state, the image unit has the optical axis in the overlapping portion of the image unit arranged on the one side in the first direction with respect to the end on the other side in the first direction of the lens unit.
  • the at least one third projecting portion may have at least one third groove portion that fits from the inside in a portion that is closest to.
  • At least one third protrusion fits into at least one third groove at the overlapping portion in the first direction between the image unit and the lens unit, so that the positional relationship in the direction intersecting the third direction is fixed.
  • the Therefore when at least one of the image unit and the lens unit moves in the first direction according to an operation on the operation member, it is possible to suppress the image unit and the lens unit from moving in a direction intersecting the optical axis.
  • at least one 3rd protrusion part and at least 1 3rd groove part are provided in the position close
  • the at least one third protrusion has a pair of third protrusions provided on each of one side and the other side of the lens unit overlapping portion in a direction orthogonal to the optical axis
  • the at least one third groove portion may include a pair of third groove portions provided on each of one side and the other side of the image unit overlapping portion in a direction orthogonal to the optical axis.
  • the positional relationship between the image unit and the lens unit in the direction intersecting the third direction is fixed on both sides of the overlapping portion in the first direction in the direction orthogonal to the first direction. Therefore, when at least one of the image unit and the lens unit moves in the first direction according to an operation on the operation member, it is possible to appropriately suppress the image unit and the lens unit from moving in a direction intersecting the optical axis.
  • the at least one third protrusion is provided at a position including the center of the lens unit in the second direction,
  • the at least one third groove may be provided at a position including a center of the image unit in the second direction.
  • the housing is A first housing on the one side in the second direction; A second housing on the other side in the second direction; The image unit and the lens unit are held in the first housing, The operation member may be held by the second housing.
  • the image display device is attached to the user in a state where the first direction of the housing faces the left-right direction and one side of the second direction faces the user
  • the image unit and the lens unit are held in the first housing that is arranged close to the user side.
  • the image display device is fixed to the user's head by a mounting member or the like, and the mounting member is connected to the first housing, the image unit and the lens unit are appropriately fixed to the user's head. Is done.
  • a plane portion including a plurality of end portions arranged on the same plane may be provided on the other side of the second direction in the image unit.
  • the image unit can be easily placed on a table or the like using the flat surface as a base. For this reason, the image unit can be stabilized when the image display apparatus is manufactured by assembling the image unit in the housing. Thereby, manufacture of an image display apparatus can be facilitated.
  • An image display device as described above;
  • a wearing tool having a first portion extending in the first direction and a pair of second portions extending from both sides of the first portion to the one side in the second direction;
  • a connection tool connected to the first part of the wearing tool and connected to the image display device; It is the head mounted display characterized by having provided.
  • the first portion is curved in a convex shape toward the other side in the second direction,
  • the connector extends from the first portion along the third direction;
  • One end of the connection tool is connected to the wearing tool,
  • the image display device may be connected to the other end of the connection tool.
  • FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II in FIG. 2. It is a disassembled perspective view of HMD1 seen from the left diagonal front. 3 is a perspective view of an eyepiece optical system 130 and an adjuster 70 as viewed from the left diagonally rear. FIG. It is a rear view of HMD1. It is a perspective view of the 2nd case 30 seen from the left diagonal front. It is a figure which shows the state by which the eyepiece optical system 130 is arrange
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a positional relationship between a cam groove and a protrusion 136 in a state where the eyepiece optical system is disposed on the leftmost side. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship of the cam groove 76 and the protrusion part 136 in the state by which the eyepiece optical system 130 is arrange
  • 3 is a perspective view of a main body member 11.
  • FIG. 3 is a left side view of the main body member 11.
  • FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a housing 12.
  • FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view inside the main body member 11.
  • 6 is a left side view of the image unit 7.
  • FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a lens unit 6.
  • FIG. 4 is a right side view of the lens unit 6.
  • FIG. 6 is a rear view of the adjustment mechanism 4.
  • FIG. 7 is a perspective view of a holder 5.
  • FIG. 7 is a perspective view of a holder 5.
  • FIG. It is a figure which shows the state from which the holder 5 and the half mirror 56 were removed from the housing
  • FIG. It is a figure which shows the state in which the holder 5 and the half mirror 56 were mounted
  • FIG. It is a perspective view of the lens unit 6, the image unit 7, the operation member 3, and the adjustment mechanism 4 in a 1st state.
  • FIG. 1 It is a perspective view of the lens unit 6, the image unit 7, the operation member 3, and the adjustment mechanism 4 in a 2nd state.
  • 3 is a left side view of the main body member 11.
  • FIG. It is a perspective view of main body member 11A of HMD1 in a modification.
  • HMD1 which is one embodiment of this indication is explained with reference to drawings.
  • the upper left, lower, front, rear, left, and right of the HMD 1 are respectively defined as the upper left, lower right, lower left, lower right, upper left, left, and right in FIG.
  • the upper left, lower, front, rear, left, and right of the HMD 1 are respectively defined as the upper left, lower right, lower left, lower right, upper left, left, and right in FIG.
  • the HMD 1 is an optically transmissive see-through HMD.
  • the light of the scenery in front of the user's eyes is directly guided to the eyes of the user by passing through the half mirror 80 (see FIG. 2, described later).
  • the projection format of HMD1 is a virtual image projection type.
  • the light of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 126 (see FIG. 3, described later) is guided to the user's eyes by reflecting the half mirror 80. With these, the HMD 1 can make the user recognize the image created on the scene in front of the eyes in an overlapping manner.
  • the HMD 1 includes a housing 10.
  • the housing 10 is an example of a support member.
  • the housing 10 has a hollow rectangular parallelepiped shape extending in the left-right direction.
  • the housing 10 is formed of a resin member.
  • casing 10 is attached to the spectacles type flame
  • the eyeglass-type frame 91 is an example of a wearing tool worn on the user's head.
  • the eyeglass-type frame 91 includes a left frame portion 92, a right frame portion 93, a central frame portion 94, and an HMD support portion 96.
  • the left frame part 92 is hung on the left ear of the user.
  • the right frame portion 93 is hung on the user's right ear.
  • the central frame portion 94 which is an example of the first portion, extends in the left-right direction between the front end portion of the left frame portion 92 and the front end portion of the right frame portion 93.
  • the left frame portion 92 and the right frame portion 93 extend rearward from both sides of the central frame 94, respectively.
  • the center frame portion 94 includes a pair of nose pads 95 (only one is shown in FIG. 1) at the center in the longitudinal direction.
  • the HMD support portion 96 that is an example of a connection tool is provided on the upper right end side of the center frame portion 94.
  • the HMD support part 96 includes a downward extension part 98.
  • the downward extending portion 98 extends in the vertical direction.
  • the downward extending portion 98 is provided with a plurality of tooth portions (not shown) having saw-like irregularities in the vertical direction.
  • a held portion 49 is provided on the rear surface of the housing 10 facing the spectacle frame 91.
  • the held portion 49 includes a groove 49A extending in the vertical direction.
  • a downward extending portion 98 (see FIG. 1) is fitted in the groove 49A.
  • a leaf spring (not shown) is provided at the bottom of the groove 49A. The leaf spring is locked to one of the tooth portions provided in the downward extending portion 98. As a result, the HMD 1 can be positioned in the vertical direction.
  • the housing 10 includes a first housing 20, a second housing 30, and a third housing 40.
  • the first housing 20 has a hollow rectangular parallelepiped shape.
  • the first housing 20 is provided with a left opening 21, a right opening 23, and a rear opening 22.
  • the left opening 21 is provided in the left wall 21 ⁇ / b> A of the first housing 20.
  • the left opening 21 penetrates the left wall 21A in the left-right direction.
  • the right opening 23 is provided in the right wall 23 ⁇ / b> A of the first housing 20.
  • the right opening 23 penetrates the right wall 23A in the left-right direction.
  • the rear opening 22 is provided on the rear wall (not shown) of the first housing 20.
  • the rear opening 22 penetrates the rear wall portion in the front-rear direction.
  • the second housing 30 is fixed to the rear wall portion of the first housing 20 so as to close the rear opening 22. Details of the configuration of the second housing 30 will be described later.
  • the third housing 40 is fixed to the right wall portion 23A of the first housing 20 so as to close the right opening 23. Insertion holes 41 (see FIG. 1) are provided on the upper side and the lower side of the right side surface of the third housing 40, respectively.
  • the upper insertion hole 41 corresponds to a screw hole 23B (see FIG. 3) provided on the upper side of the right opening 23 in the right wall 23A.
  • a screw 42 inserted from the right side of the third housing 40 into the upper insertion hole 41 is fastened to the screw hole 23 ⁇ / b> B, whereby the upper portion of the third housing 40 is fixed to the first housing 20.
  • the lower insertion hole 41 corresponds to a screw hole (not shown) provided on the lower side of the right opening 23 in the right wall portion 23A.
  • a screw (not shown) inserted from the right side of the third housing 40 into the lower insertion hole 41 is tightened into the screw hole of the right wall portion 23A, so that the lower side portion of the third housing 40 is It is fixed to the first housing 20.
  • the half mirror 80 is fixed to the left wall portion 21 ⁇ / b> A of the first housing 20. Details of the configuration of the half mirror 80 will be described later.
  • Control board 110 liquid crystal unit 120, eyepiece optical system 130
  • the control board 110 acquires image data from an external device (not shown) connected via a communication line (not shown).
  • the liquid crystal unit 120 generates image light based on the image data received by the control board 110.
  • the eyepiece optical system 130 has a plurality of lenses (not shown). The plurality of lenses guide the image light generated by the liquid crystal unit 120 from right to left.
  • the eyepiece optical system 130 is located on the right side of the half mirror 80. At least a part of the image light guided by the eyepiece optical system 130 is reflected backward by the half mirror 80.
  • the left-right direction is also referred to as “first direction”
  • the front-rear direction is also referred to as “second direction”.
  • the traveling direction of the image light reflected by the half mirror 80 (the direction in which the half mirror 80 reflects the image light) is also referred to as “reflection direction”.
  • the liquid crystal unit 120 includes a liquid crystal holder 121, a liquid crystal display device 126, and a liquid crystal substrate 127 (see FIG. 3).
  • the liquid crystal holder 121 includes a support wall 122, a front side wall 123, and a rear side wall 124.
  • the support wall 122 is a substantially rectangular plate-like member that is long in the front-rear direction in plan view.
  • the front side wall 123 and the rear side wall 124 are respectively substantially rectangular plate-like members that are long in the vertical direction when viewed from the front.
  • the front side wall 123 is erected upward from the front end of the support wall 122.
  • the rear side wall portion 124 is erected upward from the rear end portion of the support wall portion 122.
  • the liquid crystal display device 126 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape.
  • the liquid crystal display device 126 is supported from below by the support wall 122 and is sandwiched between the front side wall 123 and the rear side wall 124. Thereby, the liquid crystal display device 126 is held by the liquid crystal holder 121.
  • the liquid crystal substrate 127 is a substrate that controls the liquid crystal display device 126 and is fixed to the right side of the liquid crystal display device 126.
  • the liquid crystal substrate 127 is connected to the control substrate 110 (see FIG. 3) via a flexible printed circuit (FPC) 128 (see FIG. 3).
  • the rear side wall portion 124 is fixed to the second housing 30 with screws 34B (see FIG. 6). That is, the second housing 30 fixes and supports the liquid crystal unit 120.
  • a two-dimensional display element such as DMD or organic EL may be used.
  • a retinal scanning type projection device Retinal Scanning Display
  • projects two-dimensionally scanned light onto the retina of the user is also applicable.
  • the eyepiece optical system 130 is supported by the second housing 30 so as to be reciprocally movable in the first direction.
  • the eyepiece optical system 130 includes a lens holder 131.
  • the lens holder 131 has a substantially rectangular tube shape. As shown in FIG. 5, the lens holder 131 is provided with inclined portions 132 to 135.
  • the inclined portions 132 to 135 are planar portions in which the rear upper portion, rear lower portion, front lower portion, and front upper portion of the lens holder 131 are chamfered in the left-right direction.
  • a plurality of lenses (not shown) are fixed inside the lens holder 131.
  • the optical axes of the plurality of lenses are arranged on an axis extending in the left-right direction at the center of the lens holder 131.
  • a protrusion 136 is provided on the front side 131 ⁇ / b> A of the lens holder 131.
  • the protruding portion 136 is formed in a columnar shape and protrudes forward from the front side surface 131A. In other words, the protrusion 136 protrudes in the direction opposite to the reflection direction (hereinafter referred to as the opposite direction).
  • the protrusion 136 is inserted into the cam groove 76 (see FIG. 5) described later from the rear.
  • a pair of sliding portions 146 included in the lens holder 131 will be described later.
  • the half mirror 80 is a plate-like member that is fixed to the front side portion of the left opening 21 in the left wall portion 21 ⁇ / b> A of the first housing 20.
  • the first housing 20 fixes and supports the half mirror 80.
  • the half mirror 80 may be formed of, for example, a transparent resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate, optical glass, or the like.
  • the half mirror 80 includes a first plate-like portion 85 and a second plate-like portion 88.
  • the first plate-like portion 85 has a substantially rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction when viewed from the left side.
  • the second plate-like portion 88 extends obliquely left rearward from the rear end portion of the first plate-like portion 85.
  • the first plate 85 is provided with a round hole 81, an insertion hole 82, and a long hole 83 in order from the top to the bottom.
  • Each of the round hole 81 and the long hole 83 is inserted with a columnar protrusion (not shown) protruding leftward from the left wall 21A.
  • the insertion hole 82 corresponds to a screw hole (not shown) provided in the left wall portion 21A.
  • a screw (not shown) inserted through the insertion hole 82 is fastened to a screw hole (not shown) provided in the left wall portion 21A.
  • the rear surface 88 ⁇ / b> A of the second plate-shaped portion 88 is a surface on which image light guided by the eyepiece optical system 130 is irradiated.
  • a reflective surface 89 is formed on the surface 88A.
  • the reflection surface 89 is a region that reflects at least a part of the image light guided by the eyepiece optical system 130 in the reflection direction.
  • the reflection surface 89 is, for example, a thin film layer of metal such as aluminum formed on a part of the surface 88A so as to have a predetermined reflectance (for example, 50%).
  • any thin film forming process such as vapor deposition or sputtering may be used.
  • a multilayer film using a metal such as titanium or a dielectric material may be formed on the reflective surface instead of or in addition to aluminum.
  • a multilayer film made of only a dielectric material that does not use metal may be used as the reflecting surface.
  • a reflective member having a mirror surface that can reflect all the image light of the eyepiece optical system 130 may be provided in the first housing 20.
  • This reflecting member can be obtained, for example, by forming a thin film of a metal material such as aluminum having a reflectance of approximately 100% as a mirror surface on a transparent resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate, or a substrate such as optical glass. .
  • an arbitrary thin film processing process such as vapor deposition or sputtering is used.
  • the mirror surface may be formed by mirror-polishing the surface using a metal material itself such as aluminum as a base material.
  • Second housing 30 The configuration of the second housing 30 will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the second housing 30 is disposed on the reflection direction side with respect to the first housing 20.
  • the second housing 30 that is one of the first housing 20 and the second housing 30 is disposed on the reflection direction side with respect to the first housing 20 that is the other.
  • the second housing 30 includes a front wall portion 31, an upper wall portion 32, and a lower wall portion 33.
  • the front wall portion 31 is a substantially rectangular plate-like member when viewed from the front.
  • the upper wall portion 32 extends forward from the upper end portion of the front wall portion 31.
  • the lower wall portion 33 extends forward from the lower end portion of the front wall portion 31.
  • the second housing 30 is provided with three insertion holes 34 and a pair of guide portions 35.
  • the three insertion holes 34 respectively penetrate the upper left corner, the lower left corner, and the upper right corner of the front wall portion 31 in the front-rear direction.
  • the three insertion holes 34 correspond to three screw holes (not shown) provided in the rear wall portion (not shown) of the first housing 20.
  • a screw 34A (see FIG. 6) is inserted through the insertion hole 34 and tightened into a screw hole in the rear wall portion of the first housing 20, whereby the second housing 30 and the first housing 20 (see FIG. 4). Is fixed.
  • the three screws 34A are arranged on the reflection direction side of the housing 10 (see FIG. 6).
  • One of the pair of guide portions 35 includes a shaft portion 38.
  • the shaft portion 38 is provided below the front surface of the front wall portion 31.
  • the shaft portion 38 includes two shaft mounting portions 36 and a shaft member 37.
  • the two shaft attachment portions 36 are provided side by side in the first direction.
  • Each of the shaft attachment portions 36 is formed by a pair of wall portions that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and face each other.
  • the shaft member 37 is cylindrical and extends along the first direction.
  • the shaft member 37 has two attachment portions 37A and a sliding portion 37B.
  • the two attachment portions 37 ⁇ / b> A are formed at both end portions of the shaft member 37.
  • the sliding portion 37 ⁇ / b> B is formed between the two attachment portions 37 ⁇ / b> A of the shaft member 37.
  • the diameter of the attachment portion 37A is smaller than the diameter of the slid portion 37B, and is substantially equal to the distance between the pair of wall portions that form the respective shaft attachment portions 36.
  • the shaft member 37 is detachably attached to the shaft attachment portion 36 by fitting the attachment portion 37A to the shaft attachment portion 36 from the front.
  • the other of the pair of guide portions 35 includes a protruding portion 39.
  • the protruding portion 39 protrudes downward from the lower surface of the upper wall portion 32. In other words, the protruding portion 39 protrudes in a direction that intersects the first direction.
  • the protruding portion 39 is a plate-like member that extends along the first direction and has a thickness in the front-rear direction.
  • the protrusion 39 and the two shaft attachment portions 36 are spaced apart in the vertical direction intersecting the first direction and the second direction.
  • a pair of sliding portions 146 The pair of sliding portions 146 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, in FIG. 5, illustration of the housing
  • the pair of sliding portions 146 are projecting portions that project rearward from the rear side of the lens holder 131, for example.
  • the pair of sliding portions 146 are slidable by sliding along the pair of guide portions 35 (see FIG. 7), respectively.
  • One of the pair of sliding portions 146 includes two shaft insertion portions 141.
  • the two shaft insertion portions 141 are provided on the front side and the rear side of the inclined portion 133 from the substantially left and right centers, respectively.
  • the two shaft insertion portions 141 are provided apart from each other in the first direction.
  • Each shaft insertion portion 141 includes a rear protrusion 143 and a hole 144.
  • the rear protrusion 143 is a substantially semicircular plate-like member when viewed from the right side.
  • the hole 144 is a circular opening that penetrates the rear protrusion 143 in the first direction.
  • the hole portions 144 provided in the two shaft insertion portions 141 are separated from each other in the first direction.
  • the inner diameter of the hole 144 is slightly larger than the diameter of the sliding part 37B.
  • the other of the pair of sliding portions 146 includes an upper standing portion 147.
  • the upper standing portion 147 is provided at the center of the inclined portion 132 on the left and right sides.
  • the upper standing portion 147 is separated from the two shaft insertion portions 141 in the vertical direction.
  • the upper standing portion 147 is disposed at a position between the two shaft insertion portions 141 in the first direction.
  • the upper standing portion 147 is formed by a pair of wall portions that are separated in the front-rear direction and face each other.
  • the upper standing portion 147 slightly extends in the first direction.
  • the upper standing portion 147 includes a groove portion 145.
  • the groove portion 145 is formed between the pair of wall portions of the upper standing portion 147.
  • the groove width of the groove portion 145 is slightly larger than the thickness of the protruding portion 39 (see FIG. 7).
  • a method for attaching the eyepiece optical system 130 to the second housing 30 will be described.
  • the shaft member 37 removed from the attachment portion 37A (see FIG. 7) is inserted into the two holes 144.
  • the protrusion 39 (see FIG. 7) is fitted in the groove 145, the two attachment portions 37A are attached to the corresponding shaft attachment portions 36 (see FIG. 7).
  • the projecting portion 39 can slide along the groove portion 145, and the two shaft insertion portions 141 can slide along the sliding portion 37B.
  • the eyepiece optical system 130 is supported by the second housing 30 so as to be reciprocally movable along the first direction.
  • the position where the eyepiece optical system 130 is on the leftmost side is referred to as a left end position (see FIG. 8A), and the position on the rightmost side is referred to as a right end position (see FIG. 8B).
  • the left end position is a position where the eyepiece optical system 130 is closest to the half mirror 80 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, the area on the surface 88A (see FIG. 6) to which the light guided by the eyepiece optical system 130 is irradiated becomes the largest when the eyepiece optical system 130 is at the left end position.
  • this region is referred to as a maximum irradiation region 84 (see FIG. 6).
  • the maximum irradiation region 84 is inside the reflection surface 89. That is, the reflective surface 89 includes the maximum irradiation region 84.
  • Adjuster 70 The adjuster 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5.
  • the adjuster 70 is a circular member in front view.
  • the adjuster 70 is configured to be rotatable about an axis X (see FIG. 5) extending in the front-rear direction. As will be described later, when the adjuster 70 rotates, the eyepiece optical system 130 reciprocates, and the focus adjustment of the HMD 1 is performed.
  • the adjuster 70 includes a first rotating member 71 and a second rotating member 72.
  • the first rotation member 71 is a member used when the user rotates the adjuster 70.
  • the first rotating member 71 has a substantially circular lid shape when viewed from the front.
  • the first rotating member 71 includes a front wall portion 73 and a peripheral wall portion 74.
  • the front wall portion 73 is a substantially circular plate-like member when viewed from the front.
  • the peripheral wall portion 74 extends rearward from the peripheral edge portion of the front wall portion.
  • the peripheral wall portion 74 is rotatably attached to the outer peripheral surface of a cylindrical attachment portion (not shown) protruding forward from the front wall portion 20A.
  • an uneven portion 74 ⁇ / b> A is provided across the circumferential direction of the peripheral wall portion 74.
  • the uneven portion 74 ⁇ / b> A prevents the finger from sliding relative to the peripheral wall portion 74 when the user pinches the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 74 with a finger (not shown) and rotates the first rotating member 71.
  • the second rotating member 72 is a substantially circular plate-like member when viewed from the front.
  • the second rotating member 72 is located behind the first rotating member 71 with the front wall portion 20A interposed therebetween. That is, the second rotating member 72 is located inside the first housing 20.
  • the second rotating member 72 is arranged coaxially with the first rotating member 71.
  • a screw member 75 is provided at the center of the second rotating member 72.
  • the screw member 75 passes through a through hole (not shown) passing through the front wall portion 20 ⁇ / b> A of the first housing 20 inside the attachment portion, and is tightened to the center portion of the first rotating member 71.
  • the 1st rotation member 71 and the 2nd rotation member 72 rotate integrally.
  • an uneven portion 72A is provided in the circumferential direction. Any one of the concavo-convex portions 72 ⁇ / b> A is engaged with a leaf spring (not shown) provided inside the housing 10.
  • a cam groove 76 is provided on the rear side surface of the second rotating member 72.
  • the cam groove 76 is a groove formed by a part of the rear side surface of the second rotating member 72 being recessed forward.
  • the cam groove 76 extends in a spiral shape around the axis X of the adjuster 70.
  • the cam groove 76 extends away from the axis X of the adjuster 70 in the clockwise direction in the rear view (see FIG. 9A).
  • the cam groove 76 includes a start end 76A and a terminal end 76B.
  • the start end 76A is an end portion on the clockwise side of the cam groove 76 in the rear view, and the end end 76B is an end portion on the counterclockwise direction side.
  • a start end 76A that is one end in the extending direction of the cam groove 76 is farther from the axis X of the adjuster 70 than a terminal end 76B that is the other end in the extending direction.
  • the cam groove 76 in the present embodiment is formed on the rear side surface of the second rotating member 72 so that the angle range is about 170 degrees. More specifically, among the angles formed by the plane 78 (see FIG. 9A) including the start end 76A and the axis X and the plane 79 (see FIG. 9A) including the end 76B and the axis X (see FIG. 9A), Hereinafter, the first angle is about 170 degrees (see FIG. 9A). That is, the first angle is not less than 90 degrees and not more than 180 degrees. Of course, the first angle may be less than 90 degrees or greater than 180 degrees.
  • a protrusion 136 (see FIG. 4) is inserted into the cam groove 76 from behind.
  • the protrusion 136 is inserted into the cam groove 76 from the reflection direction side.
  • the second rotating member 72 rotates, the protrusion 136 is reciprocated in the first direction by the inner wall surface of the cam groove 76, and the eyepiece optical system 130 can reciprocate in the first direction.
  • the protrusion 136 is in contact with the start end 76A, the eyepiece optical system 130 is located at the left end position, and when the protrusion 136 is in contact with the terminal end 76B, the eyepiece optical system 130 is located at the right end position.
  • FIGS. 8A, 8B, 9A, and 9B a focus adjustment method will be described with reference to FIGS. 8A, 8B, 9A, and 9B.
  • the eyepiece optical system 130 before focus adjustment is located at the left end position. 8A and 8B, illustration of the half mirror 80, the first housing 20, and the third housing 40 is omitted.
  • the user pinches the concavo-convex portion 74A with a finger (not shown) and turns it counterclockwise (in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 8A and in the direction of arrow C in FIG. 9A) in front view. Rotate.
  • the user may rotate the first rotating member 71 by sandwiching the casing 10 from above and below with fingers (for example, thumb and index finger) and expanding and contracting the fingers (for example, middle finger).
  • the cam groove 76 also rotates as the second rotating member 72 rotates.
  • the outer wall surface of the cam groove 76 moves the abutting convex portion 136 to the right (the direction of arrow B in FIG. 8A and the direction of arrow D in FIG. 9A) as it rotates.
  • the convex portion 136 moves, the upper standing portion 147 (see FIG. 5) moves to the right while sliding along the protruding portion 39 (see FIG. 7), and the two shaft insertion portions 141 (see FIG. 5) are moved.
  • the eyepiece optical system 130 moves to the right while sliding along the sliding part 37B (see FIG. 7). That is, the pair of sliding portions 146 (see FIG. 5) slides along each of the pair of guide portions 35 (see FIG. 7). As a result, the eyepiece optical system 130 moves from the left end position to the right. In this case, the groove portion 145 (see FIG. 5) of the upper standing portion 147 prevents the eyepiece optical system 130 from rotating about the axis of the two hole portions 144.
  • the HMD 1 can perform focus adjustment.
  • the first rotating member 71 is provided on the front surface of the front wall portion 20A of the first housing 20.
  • the 1 rotation member 71 remains positioned on the front side of the first housing 20. Therefore, the user who performs the focus adjustment can touch the first rotating member 71 without hesitation, regardless of whether the position where the HMD 1 is provided is on the left or right side of the central frame portion 94. Therefore, the HMD 1 can improve the focus adjustment operability.
  • the liquid crystal display device 126 when the user performs focus adjustment, if the adjuster 70 is rotated, the eyepiece optical system 130 moves relative to the half mirror 80 and the liquid crystal unit 120 in the first direction. In this case, the liquid crystal display device 126 remains fixed to the second housing 30. Therefore, the liquid crystal display device 126 does not reciprocate in the first direction in accordance with the focus adjustment and receives a load that hinders the movement from the FPC or the like. Therefore, the liquid crystal display device 126 that generates image light is not easily inclined with respect to the first direction. Accordingly, the HMD 1 can make it difficult to deform an image that is visually recognized by the user even when focus adjustment is performed.
  • the eyepiece optical system 130 moves in the first direction as the pair of sliding portions 146 slide along the pair of guide portions 35. Since the pair of guide portions 35 guide the eyepiece optical system 130 along the first direction, the eyepiece optical system 130 is easy to reciprocate and is not easily tilted with respect to the first direction. Therefore, the HMD 1 can further make it difficult to deform an image to be visually recognized by the user when performing focus adjustment.
  • the screw 34A for fixing the first housing 20 and the second housing 30 is disposed in a portion of the housing 10 on the reflection direction side.
  • the screw 34 ⁇ / b> A is difficult to be seen from a viewpoint other than the user when the HMD 1 is used. Therefore, the HMD 1 can improve the appearance of the appearance.
  • casing 30 is not limited to the screw 34A.
  • a groove recessed forward may be provided in the rear wall portion of the first housing 20, and a claw may be provided on the front surface of the front wall portion 31 of the second housing 30.
  • the first housing 20 and the second housing 30 may be fixed by engaging a claw provided in the second housing 30 with the groove of the first housing 20.
  • the eyepiece optical system 130 is reciprocated along the first direction only by inserting the shaft member 37 into the hole 144, fitting the protrusion 39 into the groove 145, and attaching the shaft member 37 to the shaft attachment portion 36. It becomes possible to move. Therefore, the HMD 1 can improve assemblability.
  • the upper standing portion 147 is disposed at a position between the two shaft insertion portions 141 in the first direction.
  • the upper standing portion 147 can stably prevent the eyepiece optical system 130 from rotating about the axis of the two holes. Therefore, the HMD 1 can further stabilize the reciprocating movement of the eyepiece optical system 130.
  • the eye groove optical system 130 can reciprocate because the cam groove 76 reciprocates the protrusion 136 along the first direction.
  • the user can reciprocate the eyepiece optical system 130 simply by rotating the adjuster 70. Therefore, the HMD 1 can improve operability when performing focus adjustment.
  • the first angle (about 170 degrees) is 90 degrees or more and 180 degrees or less.
  • the adjuster 70 is used for the eyepiece optical system 130 to reciprocate by the same amount of movement as in the present embodiment.
  • the amount of movement of the eyepiece optical system 130 along the first direction per unit rotation amount increases. Since the angle range in which the cam groove 76 is formed is 90 degrees or more, the amount of movement of the eyepiece optical system 130 along the first direction per unit rotation amount of the adjuster 70 is suppressed.
  • the first angle is 180 degrees or less, the user does not have to change the adjuster 70 pinched with a finger when performing the focus adjustment. Therefore, when the first angle is 90 degrees or more and 180 degrees or less, the user can finely adjust the eyepiece optical system 130 without changing the adjuster 70 pinched with a finger. Accordingly, the HMD 1 can further improve the focus adjustment operability.
  • the reflection surface 89 includes the maximum irradiation region 84. Accordingly, the image light that the eyepiece optical system 130 irradiates to the surface 88 ⁇ / b> A does not deviate from the reflecting surface 89 regardless of the reciprocating position. Therefore, the HMD 1 can make the user visually recognize the image light image stably regardless of the position of the eyepiece optical system 130.
  • HMD1 can suppress the magnitude
  • the HMD 101 is an optically transmissive see-through HMD.
  • the light in the scene in front of the user's eyes is guided directly to the user's eyes by passing through the half mirror 56.
  • the projection format of the HMD 101 is a virtual image projection type.
  • the half mirror 56 reflects the light of the image displayed on the liquid crystal panel 72B (see FIG. 15, described later) toward the eye on one side of the user.
  • the HMD 101 can allow the user to recognize an image superimposed on the scene in front of him.
  • the HMD 101 includes a main body member 11, a mounting tool 8, and a connection tool 9.
  • the upper side, lower side, left side, right side, front side, and rear side of the HMD 101 are defined.
  • the upper side, the lower side, the left side, the right side, the front side, and the rear side of the HMD 101 correspond to, for example, the upper side, the lower side, the left side, the right side, the lower left diagonal side, and the upper right diagonal side of FIG.
  • the upper side, lower side, left side, right side, front side, and rear side of the HMD 101 correspond to directions when the wearing tool 8 is worn by the user.
  • the mounting tool 8 is made of a flexible material such as resin or metal (for example, stainless steel).
  • the mounting tool 8 includes a first portion 8A and second portions 8B and 8C.
  • the first portion 8A and the second portions 8B and 8C are each a curved elongated plate-like member.
  • the first portion 8A extends in the left-right direction and is curved in a convex shape on the front side.
  • the second portion 8B extends from an end portion on one side (for example, the left side) of the first portion 8A.
  • the second portion 8C extends from the end portion on the other side (for example, the right side) of the first portion 8A.
  • the second portions 8B and 8C each extend in a direction in which end portions on the opposite side (for example, rear side) to the side connected to the first portion 8A approach each other.
  • the wearing tool 8 is worn on the user's head with the first part 8A, the second part 8B, and 8C in contact with the frontal, right and left heads of the user, respectively. Is done. In this state, the first portion 8A extends in the left-right direction along the forehead of the user.
  • connection tool 9 is rod-shaped.
  • the connection tool 9 is made of resin or metal.
  • One end side (for example, the upper side) of the connection tool 9 is connected to the vicinity of a portion of the first portion 8A of the mounting tool 8 that is connected to the second portion 8C.
  • the connection tool 9 and the mounting tool 8 are connected by a ball joint.
  • a body member 11 to be described later is connected to the other end side (for example, the lower side) of the connection tool 9.
  • the connection tool 9 and the main body member 11 are connected by a ball joint.
  • the connection tool 9 holds the main body member 11 at a position separated from the mounting tool 8.
  • the connection tool 9 can arrange
  • the main body member 11 includes a housing 12, an operation member 3, an adjustment mechanism 4 (see FIG. 6), a deflection unit 59, a lens unit 6 (see FIG. 15), and an image unit. 7 (see FIG. 6).
  • the deflection unit 59 has a holder 5 and a half mirror 56.
  • the housing 12 includes a main body portion 12 ⁇ / b> A and a protruding portion 12 ⁇ / b> B.
  • the housing 12 is an example of a support member.
  • the main body 12A has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape with curved corners.
  • the protrusion 12B protrudes rearward from the right rear side of the main body 12A.
  • the housing 12 has a hollow box shape.
  • the front side, the upper side, the lower side, the rear side, and the right side of the main body 12A are respectively a first casing 1021, a second casing 1022, a third casing 1023 (see FIG.
  • the front surface of the first housing 1021, the upper surface of the second housing 1022, the lower surface of the third housing 1023, the rear surface of the fourth housing 24, and the fifth housing 25 The right surfaces are referred to as a first surface 21M, a second surface 22M, a third surface 23M, a fourth surface 24M (see FIG. 13), and a fifth surface 25M (see FIG. 10), respectively.
  • the left side of the housing 12 is opened, and the left side of a lens unit 6 (described later) inside the housing 12 is exposed. The left side of the lens unit 6 is not covered by the housing 12.
  • the portion where the first surface 21M and the second surface 22M are connected (hereinafter referred to as the curved portion 212), the portion where the first surface 21M and the third surface 23M are connected. (Hereinafter, referred to as a curved portion 213) is curved. As shown in FIG.
  • a curved portion 215 in the vicinity of a portion where the first surface 21M and the fifth surface 25M are connected (hereinafter referred to as a curved portion 215), in the vicinity of a portion where the second surface 22M and the fifth surface 25M are connected (
  • the curved portion 225) and the vicinity of the portion where the third surface 23M and the fifth surface 25M are connected are curved.
  • connection position 212S a position where the tangent is inclined 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction in the curved portion 212 is defined as a connection position 212S (see FIG. 12).
  • the connection position 212S is a position where the first surface 21M and the second surface 22M are connected.
  • the connection position 212S is also a position where the first housing 1021 and the second housing 1022 are connected.
  • a position where the tangent is inclined 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction in the curved portion 213 is defined as a connection position 213S (see FIG. 12).
  • the connection position 213S is a position where the first surface 21M and the third surface 23M are connected.
  • the connection position 213S is also a position where the first housing 1021 and the third housing 1023 are connected.
  • connection position 215S A position where the tangent is inclined 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction in the curved portion 215 is defined as a connection position 215S.
  • the connection position 215S is a position where the first surface 21M and the fifth surface 25M are connected.
  • the connection position 215S is also a position where the first housing 1021 and the fifth housing 25 are connected.
  • a position where the tangent is inclined 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction in the curved portion 225 is defined as a connection position 225S.
  • the connection position 225S is a position where the second surface 22M and the fifth surface 25M are connected.
  • the connection position 225S is also a position where the second housing 1022 and the fifth housing 25 are connected.
  • connection position 235S A position where the tangent is inclined 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction in the curved portion 235 is defined as a connection position 235S.
  • the connection position 235S is a position where the third surface 23M and the fifth surface 25M are connected.
  • the connection position 235S is also a position where the third housing 1023 and the fifth housing 25 are connected.
  • the second surface 22M is inclined obliquely downward as it goes from the rear side to the front side.
  • the third surface 23M is inclined obliquely upward as it goes from the rear side to the front side. For this reason, the vertical distance between the second surface 22M and the third surface 23M gradually decreases from the rear side toward the front side. Therefore, the length in the vertical direction of the fifth surface 25M, in other words, the length in the vertical direction between the connection position 225S and the connection position 235S gradually decreases from the rear side toward the front side.
  • the left end 21 ⁇ / b> C of the first housing 1021 is recessed rightward from both ends in the vertical direction toward the center in the vertical direction.
  • the left end 21C forms a substantially arc.
  • the rightmost position of the left end 21C is arranged on the right side of the leftmost position of the left end 22C of the second casing 1022 and the left end 23C of the third casing 1023.
  • the leftmost position of the left end 24C of the fourth housing 24 is arranged on the right side of the leftmost positions of the left ends 21C, 22C, and 23C.
  • the first extension portion 1021A, the second extension portion 22A, the third extension portion 1023A, and the fourth extension portion 24A corresponds to a portion extending between the left end of the lens unit 6 and the left end 21C.
  • the second extending portion 22A corresponds to a portion extending between the left end of the lens unit 6 and the left end 22C.
  • the third extending portion 1023A corresponds to a portion extending between the left end of the lens unit 6 and the left end 23C.
  • the fourth extending portion 24A corresponds to a portion extending between the left end of the lens unit 6 and the left end 24C.
  • the upper side of the first extension part 1021A is connected to the front side of the second extension part 22A.
  • the lower side of the first extension part 1021A is connected to the front side of the third extension part 1023A.
  • the rear surface of the first extension portion 1021A, the lower surface of the second extension portion 22A, and the upper surface of the third extension portion 1023A are respectively a first back surface 21B, a second back surface 22B, This is referred to as a third back surface 1023B.
  • the second back surface 22B and the third back surface 1023B face each other.
  • a front first regulating member 221A is provided on the front side of the second back surface 22B.
  • the front first regulating member 221A is a plate-like member that extends downward from the inside of the curved portion 212 (see FIG. 10) of the second back surface 22B.
  • a front first regulating member 231A is provided on the front side of the third back surface 1023B.
  • the front first regulating member 231A is a plate-like member extending upward from the inside of the curved portion 213 (see FIG. 10) in the third back surface 1023B. Both surfaces of the front first regulating members 221A and 231A face in the left-right direction. The positions in the left-right direction of the first front regulating members 221A and 231A are equal.
  • a rear first regulating member 221B is provided on the rear side of the second back surface 22B.
  • the rear first regulating member 221B is a plate-like member that extends downward along the rear end of the second extending portion 22A.
  • a rear first restriction member 231B is provided on the rear side of the third back surface 1023B.
  • the rear first regulating member 231B is a plate-like member extending upward along the rear end of the third extending portion 1023A. Both surfaces of the rear first regulating members 221B and 231B face in the front-rear direction.
  • the position in the left-right direction of the front first restriction members 221A and 231A is substantially equal to the position in the left-right direction of the right end of the rear first restriction members 221B and 231B.
  • the right end of the rear first regulating member 221B, the upper end of the left end 24C of the fourth housing 24, and the second back surface 22B form a groove 221C that is recessed upward.
  • the right end of the rear first restriction member 231B, the lower end of the left end 24C of the fourth housing 24, and the third back surface 1023B form a groove 231C that is recessed downward.
  • a hole 21 ⁇ / b> D penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at the center in the vertical direction of the first housing 1021 and on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction of the housing 12.
  • a protrusion 4A (see FIG. 15) of the adjusting mechanism 4 described later fits into the hole 21D from the rear side.
  • a recess 21E that is recessed in a circular shape toward the rear is provided.
  • An operation member 3 (see FIG. 15) to be described later fits into the recess 21E from the front side.
  • the second regulating member 211 is provided on the left side of the recess 21E and in the vicinity of the left end 21C.
  • the second restricting member 211 is a plate-like member extending rearward from a position including the center in the vertical direction of the first back surface 21B.
  • the second regulating member 211 is provided symmetrically with respect to a plane that passes through the center of the first back surface 21B in the vertical direction and is parallel to the front-rear and left-right directions. Both surfaces of the second regulating member 211 face in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG.
  • the second restricting member 211 is disposed on the right side of the left and right positions of the front first restricting members 221 ⁇ / b> A and 231 ⁇ / b> A. As shown in FIG. 13, the second restriction member 211 is disposed on the right side of the position in the left-right direction of the right end of each of the rear first restriction members 221 ⁇ / b> B and 231 ⁇ / b> B.
  • the length in the left-right direction between the right end of each of the front first regulating members 221A, 231A and the rear first regulating members 221B, 231B and the left end of the second regulating member 211 is a holder 5 (see FIG. 20) is equal to the length (thickness) in the left-right direction of the first end 51 (see FIG. 20).
  • a plurality of holes 24 ⁇ / b> D and a plurality of holes 24 ⁇ / b> E penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided in the fourth housing 24 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the housing 12.
  • Each of the plurality of holes 24 ⁇ / b> D is a plurality of screw holes for attaching an image unit 7 described later to the housing 12.
  • Each of the plurality of holes 24 ⁇ / b> E is a plurality of screw holes for attaching the connector 9 to the housing 12.
  • a hole 25D penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at the rear end of the protruding portion 12B.
  • a communication line 28 (see FIG. 11) is connected to the hole 25D.
  • the HMD 101 is connected to an external device (not shown) via the communication line 28. The external device outputs image data to the HMD 101.
  • the housing engaging portion 241 is provided at the fourth extending portion 24A of the fourth housing 24, more specifically, at the left end 24C of the fourth housing 24.
  • the housing engaging portion 241 is a plate-like member that extends leftward from a position including the center in the vertical direction of the left end 24 ⁇ / b> C of the fourth housing 24.
  • the housing engaging portion 241 is provided symmetrically with respect to a plane that passes through the center of the left end 24C in the up-down direction and is parallel to the front-rear left-right direction, for example.
  • the housing 12 is formed by combining a front housing 13 and a rear housing 14.
  • the front housing 13 includes a front housing portion of each of the first housing 1021, the second housing 1022, and the third housing 1023, and a fifth housing 25.
  • the rear housing 14 includes rear portions of the second housing 1022 and the third housing 1023, and a fourth housing 24.
  • the lens unit 6, the image unit 7, and the engaging portion 4 ⁇ / b> B of the adjusting mechanism 4 are disposed in the housing 12.
  • the holder 5 is held at the left end of the housing 12.
  • the holder 5, the lens unit 6, and the image unit 7 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side.
  • the adjustment mechanism 4 is disposed on the front side of the lens unit 6.
  • the groove 242 is provided symmetrically with respect to a plane that passes through the center of the inner surface of the fourth housing 24 in the vertical direction and is parallel to the front-rear and left-right directions.
  • the groove portion 242 extends in a straight line in the left-right direction.
  • the image unit 7 generates and emits image light of an image corresponding to image data received from an external device via the communication line 28 (see FIG. 11). As shown in FIG. 15, the image unit 7 includes a first holding member 1071, a liquid crystal display device 1072, and a second holding member 1073.
  • the first holding member 1071 includes a cylindrical member 71A and side plate members 71B, 71C, 71D.
  • the cylindrical member 71A is a substantially cylindrical member extending in the left-right direction.
  • Each optical axis 77 (see FIG. 16) of a plurality of lenses 63 to be described later is disposed on an axis extending in the left-right direction at the center of the cylindrical member 71A.
  • each of the upper part and the lower part of the cylindrical member 71 ⁇ / b> A is not curved and extends along a plane orthogonal to the vertical direction.
  • the upper portion of the cylindrical member 71A is referred to as a plane portion 713.
  • the lower portion of the cylindrical member 71A is referred to as a plane portion 714.
  • the portions other than the flat portions 713 and 714 of the cylindrical member 71A, in other words, the front side portion and the rear side portion of the cylindrical member 71A are referred to as a curved portion 715.
  • the length from the optical axis 77 to the plane portions 713 and 714 is equal to or shorter than the length from the optical axis 77 to the curved portion 715.
  • the length from the optical axis 77 to the plane portions 713 and 714 is the shortest at the center in the front-rear direction of each of the plane portions 713 and 714.
  • a groove portion 713A having an inner surface recessed upward is provided at a position including the front-rear direction center of the flat surface portion 713.
  • the groove portion 713A is provided symmetrically with respect to a plane that passes through the center in the front-rear direction of the plane portion 713 and is parallel to the up-down and left-right directions, for example.
  • a groove portion 714A having an inner surface recessed downward is provided at a position including the front-rear direction center of the flat portion 714.
  • the groove 714A is provided symmetrically with respect to a plane that passes through the center in the front-rear direction of the plane part 714 and is parallel to the upper, lower, left, and right directions.
  • Each of the groove portions 713A and 714A extends between both left and right end portions of the cylindrical member 71A.
  • the side plate members 71B, 71C, 71D are flat plate-like members extending from the right end portion of the cylindrical member 71A to the right side.
  • each of the pair of planes having the largest area faces the front-rear direction.
  • each of the pair of planes having the largest area faces in the vertical direction.
  • the lower end of the side plate member 71B is connected to the front end of the side plate member 71D
  • the lower end of the side plate member 71C is connected to the rear end of the side plate member 71D.
  • Screws inserted into the plurality of holes 24D are fastened to screw holes 711 provided in the side plate member 71C.
  • the image unit 7 has projecting portions 712A, 712B, and 712C that project forward from the side plate member 71B.
  • the protrusions 712A, 712B, 712C are plate-shaped.
  • the protrusions 712A and 712B extend in parallel in the left-right direction.
  • the protrusion 712A is disposed above the protrusion 712B.
  • the protruding portion 712C extends in the vertical direction.
  • the upper end of the protrusion 712C is connected to the right end of the protrusion 712A, and the lower end of the protrusion 712C is connected to the right end of the protrusion 712B.
  • the front-rear direction positions of the front end portions of the projecting portions 712A, 712B, and 712C are the same. That is, the front end portions of the projecting portions 712A, 712B, and 712C are arranged on a virtual plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction.
  • the protruding portions 712A, 712B, and 712C are collectively referred to as the protruding portion 712.
  • the liquid crystal display device 1072 has a glass substrate 1072A and a liquid crystal panel 72B.
  • the glass substrate 1072A and the liquid crystal panel 72B are disposed in a portion of the first holding member 1071 surrounded by the side plate members 71B, 71C, 71D.
  • the liquid crystal panel 72B is a well-known rectangular liquid crystal panel.
  • the liquid crystal panel 72B generates image light by displaying an image on the left side surface.
  • the glass substrate 1072A is provided on the left side surface of the liquid crystal panel 72B, and protects the display surface of the liquid crystal panel 72B.
  • the liquid crystal panel 72B is a reflective liquid crystal
  • light from a light source enters the liquid crystal panel 72B.
  • the liquid crystal panel 72B reflects the incident light to generate image light.
  • the image light generated by the liquid crystal panel 72B passes through the glass substrate 1072A to the left.
  • the second holding member 1073 has a substrate holding portion 73A and a control substrate 73B.
  • the substrate holding portion 73A is disposed on the right side of the liquid crystal panel 72B of the liquid crystal display device 1072.
  • the control board 73B is disposed on the right side of the board holding portion 73A.
  • the control board 73B is connected to the liquid crystal panel 72B via a flexible printed board (not shown).
  • the communication line 28 (see FIG. 11) is connected to the control board 73B.
  • the control board 73 ⁇ / b> B receives the image data transmitted from the external device via the communication line 28.
  • the control board 73B outputs a control signal to the liquid crystal panel 72B via the flexible printed board, thereby causing the liquid crystal panel 72B to display an image corresponding to the image data.
  • a two-dimensional display device such as a digital mirror device (DMD) or an organic EL may be used instead of the liquid crystal panel 72B.
  • a retina scanning type projection device Retinal Scanning Display
  • projects light two-dimensionally scanned onto the retina of the user may be used.
  • the lens unit 6 is disposed on the left side of the image unit 7.
  • the lens unit 6 guides the image light emitted from the image unit 7 to the half mirror 56 disposed on the left side of the lens unit 6.
  • the lens unit 6 includes a holding member 61, a cylindrical member 62, and a plurality of lenses 63.
  • the holding member 61 is a substantially cylindrical member extending in the left-right direction.
  • a plurality of lenses 63 are fixed inside the holding member 61.
  • Each optical axis of the plurality of lenses 63 is disposed on an axis extending in the left-right direction at the center of the holding member 61.
  • each of the upper part and the lower part of the holding member 61 is not curved and extends along a plane orthogonal to the vertical direction.
  • the upper part of the holding member 61 is referred to as a plane portion 61C.
  • the lower part of the holding member 61 is referred to as a plane part 61D.
  • a bending portion constructed between the front end portions of the plane portions 61C and 61D is referred to as a bending portion 61A.
  • a bending portion constructed between the rear end portions of the plane portions 61C and 61D is referred to as a bending portion 61B.
  • a protruding portion 64 that protrudes forward is provided at a position including the center in the vertical direction in the curved portion 61A.
  • the protruding portion 64 is provided symmetrically with respect to a plane that passes through the center of the bending portion 61A in the vertical direction and is parallel to the front-rear and left-right directions.
  • the protrusion 64 is cylindrical.
  • the protrusion 64 fits in the cam groove 42 (see FIG. 19) of the engaging portion 4B of the adjusting mechanism 4 described later.
  • a protruding portion 65 that protrudes rearward is provided at a position including the center in the vertical direction in the curved portion 61B.
  • the protruding portion 65 is provided symmetrically with respect to a plane that passes through the center of the bending portion 61B in the vertical direction and is parallel to the front-rear and left-right directions. As shown in FIG. 17, the protrusion 65 is rod-shaped. The length of the protrusion 65 in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the up-down direction. The protrusion 65 fits into the groove 242 (see FIG. 15) of the fourth housing 24. Accordingly, the lens unit 6 is held by the rear housing 14 of the housing 12 so as to be movable in the left-right direction.
  • the cylindrical member 62 is a substantially cylindrical member extending in the left-right direction.
  • the cylindrical member 62 is provided on the right side of the holding member 61.
  • Each optical axis 77 (see FIG. 18) of the plurality of lenses 63 is disposed on an axis extending in the left-right direction at the center of the cylindrical member 62.
  • each of the upper part and the lower part of the cylindrical member 62 is not curved and extends along a plane orthogonal to the vertical direction.
  • the upper part of the cylindrical member 62 is referred to as a plane part 62C.
  • the lower part of the cylindrical member 62 is referred to as a plane part 62D.
  • Portions other than the flat portions 62C and 62D of the cylindrical member 62, in other words, the front side portion and the rear side portion of the cylindrical member 62 are referred to as a curved portion 62A.
  • the length from the optical axis 77 to the plane portions 62C and 62D is equal to or shorter than the length from the optical axis 77 to the curved portion 62A.
  • the length from the optical axis 77 to the plane portions 62C and 62D is the shortest at the front-rear direction center of each of the plane portions 62C and 62D.
  • a protruding portion 621C that protrudes upward from the outer surface is provided at a position including the center in the front-rear direction of the flat portion 62C.
  • the protruding portion 621C is provided symmetrically with respect to a plane that passes through the center in the front-rear direction of the plane portion 62C and is parallel to the upper, lower, left, and right directions.
  • a protruding portion 621D that protrudes downward from the outer surface is provided at a position including the center in the front-rear direction of the flat portion 62D.
  • the protruding portion 621D is provided symmetrically with respect to a plane that passes through the center in the front-rear direction of the plane portion 62D and is parallel to the up-down and left-right directions.
  • Each of the protrusions 621 ⁇ / b> C and 621 ⁇ / b> D extends across the left and right ends of the cylindrical member 62.
  • the lengths of the protrusions 621C and 621D in the front-rear direction are substantially the same as the lengths of the grooves 713A and 714A (see FIG. 16), respectively.
  • the sectional shape of the outer wall surface of the cylindrical member 62 of the lens unit 6 and the sectional shape of the inner wall surface of the cylindrical member 71A of the cylindrical member 71A of the image unit 7 are substantially equal. At least a part of the right side of the cylindrical member 62 fits inside at least a part of the left side of the cylindrical member 71A. In this state, the left end portion of the cylindrical member 71 ⁇ / b> A is disposed on the left side of the right end portion of the cylindrical member 62. The cylindrical member 62 and the cylindrical member 71A overlap in the left-right direction.
  • the image light generated by the image unit 7 enters the inside of the cylindrical member 62 from the right side, passes through the holding member 61 and the inside of the cylindrical member 62, and exits from the left end of the holding member 61 toward the left side.
  • the plurality of lenses 63 refracts image light incident from the right side and emits it to the left side.
  • the operation member 3 is a truncated cone-shaped member.
  • the central axis of the operation member 3 extends in the front-rear direction.
  • the operation member 3 can be rotated with the central axis as a fulcrum.
  • the operation member 3 has a front end surface 3A, a rear end surface 3B, and a side surface 3C.
  • the front end surface 3 ⁇ / b> A is a bottom portion on the front side of the operation member 3.
  • the front end surface 3A corresponds to the upper base of the truncated cone shape.
  • the rear end surface 3 ⁇ / b> B is a bottom surface on the rear side of the operation member 3.
  • the rear end surface 3B corresponds to the lower base of the truncated cone shape.
  • the front end surface 3A and the rear end surface 3B are orthogonal to the front-rear direction.
  • the rear end surface 3B is provided with a fitting groove (not shown) into which a protruding portion 4A (described later) of the adjusting mechanism 4 is fitted.
  • the side surface 3C corresponds to a frustoconical side surface.
  • the side surface 3C is provided with a plurality of projections and depressions extending in the front-rear direction. The unevenness prevents the finger from slipping on the operation member 3 when the user applies a force by bringing the finger into contact with the side surface 3C.
  • the rear end surface 3B fits into a recess 21E provided in the first housing 1021. Since the recess 21E is provided on the left side of the first housing 1021 with respect to the left-right center of the housing 12, the operation member 3 is disposed on the left side of the left-right center of the housing 12.
  • the distance between the front end surface 3A and the rear end surface 3B, that is, the length Lh in the front-rear direction of the operation member 3 is a predetermined length appropriate for the user to touch the side surface 3C to rotate the operation member. (For example, 3 mm).
  • the diameter Lf of the front end face 3A is smaller than the diameter Lr of the rear end face 3B (see FIG. 15).
  • the vertical length of the front end surface 3A at a specific position in the left-right direction of the operating member 3 (hereinafter referred to as “left-right specific position”) is larger than the vertical length of the rear end surface 3B at the specific left-right position.
  • the length in the left-right direction of the front end surface 3A at a specific position in the vertical direction of the operation member 3 (hereinafter referred to as “vertical specific position”) is always greater than the length in the left-right direction of the rear end surface 3B at the specific vertical position. Shorter.
  • the angle ⁇ of the side surface 3C with respect to the direction in which the central axis extends is such that the middle finger and the side surface 3C are in a state where the user holds the housing 12 from above and below with the thumb and index finger.
  • the predetermined angle (for example, 40 degrees) is set so as to be parallel to such an extent that the operation is facilitated.
  • the angle ⁇ is not limited to 40 degrees, and may be a value smaller than 40 degrees.
  • the adjustment mechanism 4 includes a protruding portion 4A and an engaging portion 4B.
  • the engaging portion 4B is a circular plate member. Both surfaces of the engaging portion 4B arranged in parallel face in the front-rear direction.
  • a plurality of concave portions 1041 extending in the front-rear direction are provided on the side surface of the engaging portion 4B.
  • the leaf spring 40 provided inside the housing 12 engages with any of the plurality of recesses 1041.
  • the protruding portion 4A protrudes forward from the vicinity of the circular center of the engaging portion 4B.
  • the protruding portion 4A enters the hole 21D of the first housing 1021 from the rear side and protrudes to the front side of the first surface 21M of the first housing 1021.
  • the front end of the protruding portion 4A that protrudes to the front side of the first surface 21M is fitted into a fitting groove (not shown) on the rear end surface 3B of the operation member 3 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). Accordingly, the operation member 3 and the adjustment mechanism 4 are held by the first housing 1021 of the front housing 13.
  • the adjustment mechanism 4 can rotate integrally with the operation member 3 with an axis extending in the front-rear direction passing through the circular center of the engaging portion 4B as a fulcrum.
  • the adjustment mechanism 4 may be formed integrally with the operation member 3.
  • the diameter Lr of the rear end surface 3B is the length of the first surface 21M in the vertical direction. Specifically, it is shorter than the length L1 in the vertical direction between the connection position 212S and the connection position 213S.
  • the upper end of the rear end surface 3B is disposed on the upper end of the first surface 21M, that is, below the connection position 212S, and the lower end of the rear end surface 3B is below the first surface 21M. It is arrange
  • a cam groove 42 is provided on the rear side surface of the engaging portion 4B.
  • the cam groove 42 is formed when a part of the rear side surface of the engaging portion 4B is recessed forward.
  • the cam groove 42 extends in a spiral shape with the circular center X of the engaging portion 4B as a fulcrum.
  • the cam groove 42 is separated from the circular center X as it turns clockwise as viewed from the rear side.
  • the cam groove 42 has a first end 42A and a second end 42B.
  • the first end 42A is an end portion in the clockwise direction of the cam groove 42
  • the second end 42B is an end portion in the counterclockwise direction.
  • the angle ⁇ on the cam groove 42 side Is 120 degrees.
  • the angle ⁇ is not limited to 120 degrees, and may be a value smaller than 120 degrees.
  • the protruding portion 64 of the lens unit 6 is fitted into the cam groove 42 from behind in a state where the operation member 3 and the adjustment mechanism 4 are held by the first housing 1021.
  • the deflection unit 59 includes a half mirror 56 and a holder 5. As shown in FIG. 15, the half mirror 56 is disposed on the left side of the lens unit 6. The position of the half mirror 56 with respect to the housing 12 is fixed by a holder 5 described later. For this reason, the distance from the image unit 7 held at a fixed position with respect to the housing 12 is fixed.
  • the half mirror 56 can reflect image light that has passed through the lens unit 6 and is incident from the right side to the rear side. The user's eyes can visually recognize the virtual image based on the image light reflected to the rear side by the half mirror 56. Moreover, the half mirror 56 can transmit the external light incident from the front side to the rear side.
  • the half mirror 56 has a rectangular plate shape.
  • the half mirror 56 is configured, for example, by vapor-depositing a metal such as aluminum or silver on a transparent resin or glass substrate so as to have a predetermined reflectance (for example, 50%).
  • the half mirror 56 is held by a holder 5 described later.
  • One surface 56B of both surfaces of the half mirror 56 held by the holder 5 faces diagonally right rearward, and the other surface 56C faces diagonally left frontward.
  • the half mirror 56 can reflect a part (for example, 50%) of light incident on each of the surfaces 56B and 56C and transmit the other part.
  • a reflective member capable of totally reflecting the image light incident on the surface 56B to the rear side may be used.
  • an optical path deflecting member such as a prism or a diffraction grating may be used.
  • the holder 5 is disposed on the left side of the lens unit 6 and holds the half mirror 56. As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the holder 5 includes a foundation member 50.
  • the base member 50 has a plate-like first end 51, second end 52, third end 53, and fourth end 54. Of the three parallel planes of the first end 51, each of the pair of planes having the largest area faces in the left-right direction. The upper and lower corners of the front end of the first end 51 are curved.
  • the second end 52 extends rearward from above the rear end of the first end 51.
  • the third end portion 53 extends rearward from the lower side of the rear end portion of the first end portion 51.
  • each of the pair of planes having the largest area faces in the vertical direction.
  • the fourth end portion 54 is constructed between the rear end portions of the second end portion 52 and the third end portion 53. Of the three parallel planes of the fourth end portion 54, each of the pair of planes having the largest area faces the front-rear direction.
  • the length in the left-right direction of the fourth end portion 54 is shorter than the length in the left-right direction of each of the second end portion 52 and the third end portion 53.
  • a hole 51B is formed in a portion surrounded by the first end portion 51 to the fourth end portion.
  • the right end surfaces of the first end portion 51, the second end portion 52, the third end portion 53, and the fourth end portion 54 are respectively referred to as the first end surface 51A and the first end surface 51A. These are referred to as a second end surface 52A, a third end surface 53A, and a fourth end surface 54A.
  • a hole 52 ⁇ / b> C penetrating in the vertical direction is provided in the vicinity of the left front corner of the second end portion 52.
  • a hole 53 ⁇ / b> C penetrating in the vertical direction is provided in the vicinity of the left front corner of the third end portion 53.
  • the upper protruding portion 56A protruding upward from the upper end portion of the half mirror 56 is fitted into the hole 52C from below.
  • a lower protruding portion (not shown) protruding downward from the lower end portion of the half mirror 56 is fitted into the hole 53C from above.
  • the holder 5 holds the half mirror 56 by supporting the upper protrusion 56A of the half mirror 56 through the hole 52C and supporting the lower protrusion (not shown) of the half mirror 56 through the hole 53C.
  • the half mirror 56 is disposed on the left side with respect to a plane including each of the first end surface 51A to the fourth end surface 54A.
  • a holder protrusion 52 ⁇ / b> B is provided on the upper surface of the second end 52 that is connected to the fourth end 54.
  • the holder protrusion 52B includes extending portions 521B and 522B.
  • the extending portion 521B is a plate-like portion that protrudes leftward with respect to the second end surface 52A (see FIG. 21).
  • the length in the left-right direction of the extending portion 521B is the length in the left-right direction between the upper end of the left end 24C of the fourth extending portion 24A and the right end of the rear first regulating member 221B (hereinafter referred to as “the groove portion 221C.
  • the extending portion 522B is a plate-like portion that extends forward from the left end of the extending portion 521B.
  • a holder protrusion 53 ⁇ / b> B is provided on the lower surface of the portion connected to the fourth end 54 in the third end 53.
  • the holder protrusion 53B includes extending portions 531B and 532B.
  • the extending portion 531B is a plate-like portion that protrudes leftward with respect to the third end surface 53A.
  • the length in the left-right direction of the extending portion 531B is the length in the left-right direction between the lower end of the left end 24C of the fourth extending portion 24A and the right end of the rear first restriction member 231B (hereinafter referred to as “the groove portion 231C. It is also referred to as “the length in the horizontal direction”.
  • the extending portion 532B is a plate-like portion extending forward from the left end of the extending portion 531B.
  • a first holder engaging portion 541A and second holder engaging portions 542A and 542B are provided on the fourth end face 54A of the fourth end portion 54.
  • the first holder engaging portion 541A protrudes to the right from the center of the fourth end surface 54A in the up-down direction and from the front side of the front-rear direction center.
  • the second holder engaging portion 542A protrudes to the right from the upper side in the vertical direction of the fourth end face 54A and from the rear side in the front-rear direction.
  • the second holder engagement portion 542B protrudes to the right from the lower side of the fourth end surface 54A and the rear side of the front and rear direction center.
  • the deflection unit 59 is detachably supported on the housing 12.
  • FIG. 22 shows a state before the deflection unit 59 is attached to the housing 12.
  • the deflection unit 59 has the holder 5 from the rear side with respect to the region covered in the vertical direction by the second extending portion 22A of the second housing 1022 and the third extending portion 1023A of the third housing 1023. By moving to the front side, it is attached to the housing 12.
  • the holder protrusion 52B of the holder 5 enters the groove 221C of the second extension 22A from the rear side, and the holder protrusion 53B of the holder 5 extends to the third extension.
  • the second end portion 52 of the holder 5 moves in parallel below the second back surface 22B of the second extending portion 22A of the housing 12 along the second back surface 22B.
  • the third end portion 53 of the holder 5 moves in parallel with the third back surface 1023B on the upper side of the third back surface 1023B of the third extending portion 1023A of the housing 12.
  • the first holder engaging portion 541 A (see FIG. 21) is moved to the housing engaging portion 241 (see FIG. 13) provided at the left end 24 C of the fourth housing 24. ) From the rear side.
  • the fourth end portion 54 bends to the left side, so that the first holder engaging portion 541 A gets over the left side of the housing engaging portion 241 and moves to the housing. It moves to the front side of the body engaging portion 241.
  • FIG. 23 shows a state in which the deflection unit 59 is mounted on the housing 12.
  • the front end of the first end portion 51 of the holder 5 comes into contact with the vicinity of the left end 21C of the first back surface 21B (see FIG. 22) of the first extension portion 1021A of the first housing 1021 from the rear side. Thereby, the forward movement of the holder 5 is restricted.
  • the holder 5 is disposed in a region covered in the vertical direction by the second extending portion 22A of the second housing 1022 and the third extending portion 1023A of the third housing 1023.
  • the holder 5 holds the half mirror 56 on the left side with respect to the first end face 51A to the fourth end face 54A (see FIG. 21) (see FIG. 15), so that the half mirror 56 is in contact with the first end 51. 1 Arranged on the left side of the back surface 21B.
  • the left side surface of the second restricting member 211 (see FIG. 22) is in contact with the position including the center in the vertical direction in the first end surface 51A (see FIG. 21) of the first end portion 51 of the holder 5.
  • the front first regulating member 221A (see FIG. 14) is in contact with the upper position of the left end surface of the first end portion 51 of the holder 5.
  • the right side surface of the front first regulating member 231 ⁇ / b> A comes into contact with the lower position of the left end surface of the first end portion 51 of the holder 5.
  • the length between the right end of each of the front first restriction members 221 ⁇ / b> A and 231 ⁇ / b> A and the left end of the second restriction member 211 is the length (thickness) in the left-right direction of the first end 51 of the holder 5. equal. Therefore, in a state where the deflection unit 59 is mounted on the housing 12, the right end surfaces of the first front regulating members 221 ⁇ / b> A and 231 ⁇ / b> A and the left end surface of the second regulating member 211 are in the left-right direction on the front side of the holder 5. Restrict movement.
  • the extension part 521B of the holder protrusion part 52B fits into the groove part 221C.
  • the right end of the extending portion 521B that is, the rear end portion of the second end surface 52A is in contact with the upper end portion of the left end 24C of the fourth extending portion 24A constituting the groove portion 221C.
  • the left end of the extending portion 521B is in contact with the right end of the rear first restriction member 221B.
  • the extending part 531B of the holder protruding part 53B fits into the groove part 231C.
  • the right end of the extending portion 531B that is, the rear end portion of the third end surface 53A is in contact with the lower end portion of the left end 24C of the fourth extending portion 24A constituting the groove portion 231C.
  • the left end of the extending portion 531B is in contact with the right end of the rear first restriction member 231B.
  • the upper surface of the second end portion 52 of the holder 5 is located below the second back surface 22B (see FIG. 13) of the second extending portion 22A of the housing 12 and the holder protruding portion 52B with respect to the second end portion 52.
  • the upper protrusions are spaced apart from each other.
  • the lower surface of the third end portion 53 (see FIG. 20) of the holder 5 is located above the third back surface 1023B (see FIG. 13) of the third extension portion 1023A of the housing 12, and the third end portion 53.
  • the holder projecting portion 53B is disposed so as to be opposed to each other while being separated by a downward projecting amount.
  • the length in the left-right direction of the extending portion 521B is equal to the length in the left-right direction of the groove portion 221C.
  • the length of the extending portion 531B in the left-right direction is equal to the length of the groove portion 231C in the left-right direction. Therefore, the right end of the rear first regulating member 221B and the upper end of the left end 24C of the fourth extending portion 24A in the state where the deflection unit 59 is attached to the housing 12 are the rear of the holder 5. Side to side movement is restricted.
  • the deflection unit 59 When the deflection unit 59 is mounted on the housing 12, the right end of the rear first restriction member 231 ⁇ / b> B constituting the groove 231 ⁇ / b> C and the lower end of the left end 24 ⁇ / b> C of the fourth extension 24 ⁇ / b> A are Regulate direction movement.
  • the front side surface of the housing engaging portion 241 contacts the rear side surface of the first holder engaging portion 541A (see FIG. 21).
  • the rear side surface of the housing engaging portion 241 contacts the front side surface of each of the second holder engaging portions 542A and 542B.
  • the first holder engaging portion 541A and the second holder engaging portions 542A and 542B engage with the housing engaging portion 241. Therefore, the movement of the holder 5 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the housing engaging portion 241 and the state where the deflection unit 59 is attached to the housing 12 is maintained.
  • Output of image data is started from an external device (not shown).
  • the control board 73B receives the image data via the communication line 28 (see FIG. 11).
  • the control board 73B displays an image corresponding to the received image data on the liquid crystal panel 72B.
  • the image light of the image displayed on the liquid crystal panel 72B passes through the glass substrate 1072A and the cylindrical member 71A to the left, and exits from the image unit 7 to the left.
  • the image light emitted from the image unit 7 passes through the plurality of lenses 63 of the lens unit 6 to the left, and exits from the lens unit 6 to the left.
  • the half mirror 56 reflects the image light emitted from the lens unit 6 to the rear side.
  • the image light is incident on the left eye of the user. Further, the half mirror 56 transmits the external light incident from the front side to the rear side.
  • the user recognizes the main body member 11 of the HMD 101 by superimposing a virtual image on the front scene.
  • the lens unit 6 when the user rotates the operation member 3 to adjust the focus will be described.
  • the protruding portion 64 (see FIG. 15) moves along the cam groove 42 (see FIG. 19) of the engaging portion 4B.
  • the groove 242 restricts the movement of the protrusion 65 (see FIG. 17) in the vertical direction. For this reason, the lens unit 6 moves in the left-right direction in accordance with the rotation of the adjustment mechanism 4.
  • the direction of rotation (clockwise or counterclockwise) indicates the direction when the HMD 101 is viewed from the front side, unless otherwise specified.
  • the case where the operation member 3 rotates clockwise will be specifically described as an example.
  • the pair of parallel wall surfaces extending in the front-rear direction forming the cam groove 42 (see FIG. 19) are on the right side with respect to the projecting portion 64 in contact.
  • a force is applied to move the protrusion 64 to the right.
  • the lens unit 6 moves to the right side.
  • the cylindrical member 62 (see FIG. 15) of the lens unit 6 enters the cylindrical member 71A of the image unit 7.
  • the protruding portion 621C see FIG.
  • the case where the operation member 3 is rotated counterclockwise will be specifically described as an example.
  • the pair of parallel wall surfaces extending in the front-rear direction forming the cam groove 42 are on the left side with respect to the projecting portion 64 that comes into contact.
  • a force is applied to move the protrusion 64 to the left.
  • the lens unit 6 moves to the left.
  • the cylindrical member 62 of the lens unit 6 moves to the left outside from the cylindrical member 71A of the image unit 7.
  • the protruding portion 621C of the cylindrical member 62 moves to the left along the groove 713A of the cylindrical member 71A, and the protruding portion 621D of the cylindrical member 62 moves to the left along the groove 714A (see FIG. 16) of the cylindrical member 71A.
  • the protrusion 64 comes into contact with the second end 42B of the cam groove 42, the counterclockwise rotation of the operation member 3 is restricted.
  • the right end of the holding member 61 of the lens unit 6 is separated to the left side with respect to the left end of the cylindrical member 71 ⁇ / b> A of the image unit 7.
  • the liquid crystal panel 72B (see FIG. 15) of the image unit 7 and the plurality of lenses 63 of the lens unit 6 are farthest away.
  • the state of FIG. 16 in which the lens unit 6 and the image unit 7 are most separated is referred to as a second state.
  • the lens unit 6 moves in the left-right direction, the spread angle of the image light that becomes a virtual image visually recognized by the user is changed by the plurality of lenses 63. Therefore, the user can adjust the focus by rotating the operation member 3. As shown in FIG. 19, since the angle ⁇ formed by the direction 48 and the direction 1049 is 120 degrees, the angle at which the operation member 3 can be rotated is also 120 degrees.
  • the leaf spring 40 is engaged with one of the plurality of recesses 1041 from the state in which the leaf spring 40 (see FIG. 15) is engaged with one of the plurality of recesses 1041. It changes to the state.
  • the rotation of the adjustment mechanism 4 is suppressed in a state where the leaf spring 40 is engaged with the recess 1041, and the position of the adjustment mechanism 4 is stabilized. For this reason, the user can easily hold the operation member 3 and the adjustment mechanism 4 at desired positions, so that the focus adjustment can be easily performed.
  • the protruding portion 64 is provided in the curved portion 61A of the lens unit 6, and the protruding portion 65 is provided in the curved portion 61B.
  • the protrusion 65 fits into a groove 242 provided in the fourth housing 24 of the housing 12 and is supported so as to be movable in the left-right direction with respect to the housing 12.
  • the protruding portion 64 fits in the cam groove 42 of the engaging portion 4B of the adjusting mechanism 4 provided at the rear end portion of the operation member 3.
  • the projecting portions 64 and 65, the groove portion 242 and the cam groove 42 are arranged in the front-rear direction with respect to the user, and are not arranged in the vertical direction.
  • HMD101 can suppress the magnitude
  • the housing 12 of the HMD 101 holds the image unit 7 and the half mirror 56, and fixes the distance between them.
  • the focus adjustment is performed by moving the lens unit 6 in the left-right direction and changing the distance between the lens unit 6 and the image unit 7 in accordance with an operation on the operation member 3. Since the lens unit 6 does not require external electrical control, a signal line for transmitting an electrical signal is not connected. For this reason, the movement of the lens unit 6 in the left-right direction is not hindered by the signal line. Therefore, the HMD 101 can smoothly move the lens unit 6 in the left-right direction.
  • the protruding portion 65 protrudes backward from the curved portion 61B.
  • the groove portion 242 into which the protruding portion 65 is fitted is provided on the inner side surface of the fourth housing 24. For this reason, HMD101 can suppress appropriately that the housing
  • the groove part 242 extends in a straight line in the left-right direction, the movement of the protruding part 65 in a direction other than the left-right direction can be restricted. Therefore, the HMD 101 can appropriately move the image unit 7 or the lens unit 6 in the left-right direction.
  • the shape of the protrusion part 65 is a rod shape, and long in the left-right direction. For this reason, when operation with respect to the operation member 3 is performed, HMD101 can suppress that the lens unit 6 rotates using the axis
  • the protruding portion 64 is provided at a position including the vertical center of the curved portion 61 ⁇ / b> A of the lens unit 6.
  • the protruding portion 65 is provided at a position including the center in the vertical direction of the curved portion 61B of the lens unit 6.
  • the groove portion 242 is provided at the center in the vertical direction of the inner surface of the fourth housing 24 of the housing 12. Therefore, the HMD 101 can keep the lens unit 6 horizontal even when the direction of gravity applied to the lens unit 6 changes.
  • the protruding portion 64 protrudes forward from the curved portion 61A.
  • the engaging portion 4B of the adjustment mechanism 4 having the cam groove 42 into which the protruding portion 64 is fitted is provided on the rear surface of the first housing 1021 of the housing 12. For this reason, it can suppress appropriately that the housing
  • the protruding portion 64 fits in the cam groove 42 of the engaging portion 4B and moves in the left-right direction according to the rotation of the operation member 3. Accordingly, since the lens unit 6 can be moved in the left-right direction, the HMD 101 can adjust the focus by changing the distance between the image unit 7 and the lens unit 6.
  • the protruding portions 621C and 621D of the cylindrical member 62 fit into the groove portions 713A and 714A of the cylindrical member 71A at the overlapping portion in the left-right direction between the image unit 7 and the lens unit 6.
  • the positional relationship between the image unit 7 and the lens unit 6 in the direction (front-rear direction and vertical direction) orthogonal to the left-right direction is fixed. Therefore, when the lens unit 6 moves in the left-right direction in response to an operation on the operation member 3, it is possible to suppress movement of at least one of the lens unit 6 and the image unit 7 in a direction intersecting the optical axis 77.
  • the protruding portions 621C and 621D and the groove portions 713A and 714A are provided at positions closest to the optical axis 77, respectively. For this reason, the HMD 101 can appropriately suppress the movement of the lens unit 6 and the image unit 7 in the direction intersecting the optical axis 77.
  • the projecting portions 621C and 621D are provided on the planar portions 62C and 62D arranged in the vertical direction of the cylindrical member 62 of the lens unit 6.
  • the groove portions 713A and 714A are provided in the flat surface portions 713 and 714 arranged in the vertical direction of the cylindrical member 71A of the image unit 7. For this reason, the positional relationship between the image unit 7 and the lens unit 6 in the direction intersecting the optical axis 77 is fixed on both sides in the vertical direction of the overlapping portions in the horizontal direction. Therefore, when the lens unit 6 moves in the left-right direction according to the operation on the operation member 3, it is possible to appropriately suppress the lens unit 6 and the image unit 7 from moving in the direction intersecting the optical axis 77.
  • the protrusion 621C is provided at the center in the front-rear direction of the flat part 62C
  • the protrusion 621D is provided at the center in the front-rear direction of the flat part 62D.
  • the groove portion 713A is provided at the center in the front-rear direction of the plane portion 713
  • the groove portion 714A is provided at the center in the front-rear direction of the plane portion 714.
  • the lens unit 6 and the image unit 7 are held in the rear housing 14 that is arranged close to the user side.
  • the operation member 3 and the adjustment mechanism 4 are held in the front housing 13 that is disposed apart from the user side.
  • the HMD 101 is worn by the user when the wearing tool 8 is worn on the user's head and the connecting tool 9 is connected to the rear housing 14 to support the entire housing 12. Therefore, since the lens unit 6 and the image unit 7 are held by the rear casing 14 directly connected to the connection tool 9, the lens unit 6 and the image unit 7 can be appropriately fixed to the user's head. .
  • the image unit 7 has a protrusion 712 (712A to 712C).
  • the front ends of the protrusions 712 are arranged on the same plane. In this case, it becomes easy to easily place the image unit 7 on a stand or the like using the protruding portion 712 as a base. For this reason, when the image unit 7 is assembled to the housing 12 and the HMD 101 is manufactured, the image unit 7 can be stabilized. Thereby, manufacture of HMD101 can be facilitated.
  • the mounting tool 8 of the HMD 101 has a first portion 8A that extends in the left-right direction and is curved in a convex shape toward the front, and second portions 8B and 8C that extend rearward from both sides of the first portion 8A. Further, the HMD 101 has a connection tool 9 extending from the first portion 8A of the mounting tool 8. The main body member 11 is connected to the tip of the connection tool 9. Therefore, the half mirror 56 can be held in front of the user's eyes with the wearing tool 8 worn on the user's head. Therefore, the user can work using both hands while visually recognizing the image light deflected by the half mirror 56.
  • focus adjustment may be performed by moving the image unit 7 in the left-right direction.
  • the lens unit 6 may be fixedly held on the housing 12 and the image unit 7 may be held movably in the left-right direction.
  • Projections may be provided on each of the front and rear surfaces of the image unit 7.
  • a protrusion on the front side of the image unit 7 may be fitted into the cam groove 42 of the adjustment mechanism 4 from the rear.
  • the protruding portion on the rear side of the image unit 7 may be fitted from the front into the groove portion 242 on the front surface of the fourth housing 24.
  • protrusions may be provided on the front and rear surfaces of both the image unit 7 and the lens unit 6. Focus adjustment may be performed by moving the image unit 7 and the lens unit 6 in the left-right direction.
  • the housing 12 may cover only a part of the lens unit 6 and the image unit 7.
  • the protrusion 65 of the lens unit 6 may be cylindrical.
  • the position where the protruding portion 65 is provided is not limited to the position including the center in the vertical direction of the curved portion 61B of the lens unit 6, and may be above or below the center.
  • a groove portion extending in the left-right direction and recessed forward may be provided.
  • a protruding portion that protrudes forward may be provided. Then, the lens unit 6 may be movable in the left-right direction by fitting the protrusion of the fourth housing 24 into the groove of the lens unit 6 and moving the protrusion in the left-right direction along the groove.
  • a rack gear extending in the left-right direction may be provided.
  • a pinion gear that fits into the rack gear may be provided.
  • the pinion gear may be rotated according to the rotation of the operation member 3, and the focus adjustment may be performed by moving the rack gear fitted to the pinion gear in the left-right direction.
  • the operation member 3 and the adjustment mechanism 4 may have an integral structure.
  • the protruding portion 64 of the lens unit 6 may protrude to the front side of the first housing 1021 through a slit provided in the first housing 1021 of the housing 12.
  • a cam groove 42 may be provided on the rear end surface 3 ⁇ / b> B of the operation member 3.
  • the protruding portion 64 protruding to the front side of the first housing 1021 may be fitted in the cam groove 42 of the operation member 3.
  • the lens unit 6 may move in the left-right direction by the protrusion 64 moving in the left-right direction along the slit according to the rotation of the operation member 3.
  • the image unit 7 may be provided with groove portions 713A and 714A on the front side or the rear side of the plane portion 713 and 714 with respect to the center in the front-rear direction.
  • the lens unit 6 may be provided with protrusions 621C and 621D that fit into the grooves 713A and 714A of the image unit 7 on the flat surfaces 62C and 62D, respectively.
  • the image unit 7 may be provided with a groove portion in any one of the plane portions 713 and 714.
  • the lens unit 6 may be provided with a protruding portion that fits into the groove portion of the image unit 7 in any one of the plane portions 62C and 62D.
  • two or more groove portions may be provided in each of the plane portions 713 and 714.
  • the lens unit 6 may be provided with two or more projecting portions that fit into two or more groove portions of the image unit 7 in each of the planar portions 62C and 62D.
  • the image unit 7 may be provided with a groove in the curved portion 715.
  • the lens unit 6 may be provided with a protrusion that fits in the groove of the image unit 7 in the curved portion 62A. You may open
  • Projections may be provided on the plane portions 713 and 714 of the image unit 7. Groove portions that fit into the protruding portions of the flat portions 713 and 714 of the image unit 7 may be provided in the flat portions 62C and 62D of the lens unit 6.
  • the image unit 7 may be held by the front housing 13.
  • the side plate member 71 ⁇ / b> B of the image unit 7 may be provided with a column or prism that protrudes forward instead of the protruding portion 712.
  • the HMD 101 may be configured only with the main body member 11 without including the mounting tool 8 and the connection tool 9.
  • the body member 11 may be directly fixed to glasses or the like. Further, the HMD 101 may be configured by the connection tool 9 and the main body member 11 without including the mounting tool 8.
  • the main body member 11A of the HMD 101 in the modification of the present disclosure will be described.
  • the main body member 11A is different from the main body member 11 (see FIG. 11 and the like) in that the operation member 3 is changed to the operation member 1030, and the other parts are the same.
  • the operation member 1030 will be described, and description of other parts will be omitted.
  • the operation member 1030 includes a first member 36 and a second member 1037.
  • the first member 36 projects forward from the recess 21E of the first surface 21M of the first housing 1021.
  • the first member 36 is cylindrical.
  • the central axis of the first member 36 is parallel to the front-rear direction.
  • the second member 1037 is provided on the front end surface 36 ⁇ / b> A of the first member 36.
  • the second member 1037 has a rod shape with a rectangular cross section.
  • the second member 1037 extends in a direction (vertical direction in FIG. 27) orthogonal to the front-rear direction.
  • the length of the second member 1037 is larger than the diameter of the front end face 36 ⁇ / b> A of the first member 36.
  • One end portion 1037 ⁇ / b> A and the other end portion 1037 ⁇ / b> B of the second member 1037 protrude outward from the side surface of the first member 36.
  • a fitting groove (not shown) into which the protruding portion 4A (see FIG. 15) of the adjusting mechanism 4 is fitted is provided on the rear end surface of the first member 36.
  • the operation member 1030 and the adjustment mechanism 4 are held by the first housing 1021 in a state where the protrusion 4A is fitted in the fitting groove.
  • the operation member 1030 and the adjustment mechanism 4 can rotate together with the central axis of the operation member 1030 as a fulcrum.
  • the user when the user wears the wearing tool 8 and arranges the half mirror 56 in front of the left eye (right-side eye), the user can end the second member 1037 of the operation member 1030. It is possible to easily apply force to the portion 1037A with the middle finger 86. Therefore, the user can easily rotate the operation member 1030.
  • the user places the half mirror 56 in front of the right eye (the left eye toward the left) as an example.
  • the user arranges the second surface 22M of the second housing 1022 on the lower side so that the field of view of the left eye of the user is not blocked by the main body member 11, and the third surface of the third housing 1023
  • the main body member 11 is used in a state in which the surface 23M is disposed on the upper side (that is, a state in which the vertical direction is inverted with respect to FIG. 10).
  • An end portion 1037 ⁇ / b> A of the second member 1037 protrudes downward with respect to the first member 36, and an end portion 1037 ⁇ / b> B protrudes upward with respect to the first member 36.
  • the user can easily apply a force to the end portion 1037B with the middle finger 86, so that the operation member 1030 can be easily rotated.
  • the operation member 1030 is used in a state in which the vertical direction of the main body member 11 is inverted, that is, in a state where the half mirror 56 is disposed in front of the user's left eye (right eye toward the user). Even in such a case, the user can easily adjust the focus.
  • focus adjustment may be performed by moving the image unit 7 in the left-right direction. Specifically, it is as follows.
  • the image unit 7 may be held so as to be movable in the left-right direction.
  • a protrusion may be provided on the front surface of the image unit 7.
  • the protruding portion of the image unit 7 may be fitted into the cam groove 42 of the adjustment mechanism 4 from the rear.
  • focus adjustment may be performed by moving both the image unit 7 and the lens unit 6 in the left-right direction.
  • the housing 12 may cover only a part of the lens unit 6 and the image unit 7.
  • An angle ⁇ between the side surface of the truncated cone shape of the operation member 3 and the front-rear direction may be larger than 40 degrees.
  • the shape of the operation member 3 may be a shape other than the truncated cone shape.
  • the operation member 3 may have a truncated pyramid shape, or may be a cylinder or a prism.
  • the rotatable angle ⁇ of the operation member 3 may be greater than 120 degrees.
  • the length Lh (height) of the operation member 3 in the front-rear direction may be less than 3 mm.
  • the portion where the first surface 21M and the second surface 22M of the housing 12 are connected and the portion where the first surface 21M and the third surface 23M are connected may be angular.
  • the distance between the second surface 22M and the third surface 23M may be uniform. That is, the second surface 22M and the third surface 23M may be parallel.
  • the housing 12 may be substantially cylindrical with the left-right direction as the axial direction.
  • the left end 21C of the first housing 1021 was recessed rightward from the both ends in the vertical direction toward the center in the vertical direction.
  • a transparent member may be provided in the recessed portion.
  • the left-right position of the left end 22C of the second extension part 22A and the left end 23C of the third extension part 1023A may be the same as the left-right position of the left end of the transparent member.
  • the HMD 101 may be configured only with the main body member 11 without including the mounting tool 8 and the connection tool 9.
  • the body member 11 may be directly fixed to glasses or the like. Further, the HMD 101 may be configured by the connection tool 9 and the main body member 11 without including the mounting tool 8.
  • the second member 1037 of the operation member 1030 may be a rod-shaped member extending in one direction from the center of the front end surface 36A of the first member 36. Further, the second member 1037 may be a plurality of rod-like members extending in three or more directions from the center of the front end surface 36A of the first member 36. The extending direction of the second member 1037 may be inclined with respect to the direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction. The second member 1037 of the operation member 1030 may protrude from the side surface of the first member 36.
  • a head-mounted display capable of adjusting the focus.
  • a conventional HMD includes an eyepiece optical system, a liquid crystal display device, a control board, and a connection member.
  • the eyepiece optical system, the liquid crystal display device, and the control board are provided along the optical axis direction.
  • the liquid crystal display device is provided between the eyepiece optical system and the control board, and emits light of an image to be visually recognized by the user toward the eyepiece optical system.
  • the liquid crystal display device is movable relative to the eyepiece optical system and the control board.
  • the control board controls the liquid crystal display device.
  • the connecting member is a bendable member such as a conductive wire, and electrically connects the control board and the liquid crystal display device.
  • the relative position of the liquid crystal display device and the eyepiece optical system changes as the liquid crystal display device moves relative to the eyepiece optical system. Thereby, the head mounted display performs focus adjustment.
  • the arrangement position of the connection member with respect to the liquid crystal display device changes with the relative movement of the liquid crystal display device.
  • the liquid crystal display device may be subjected to a load that hinders relative movement due to deformation of the connection member.
  • the liquid crystal display device is inclined with respect to the optical axis direction, and there is a possibility that an image that is visually recognized by the user is deformed.
  • the present disclosure further provides a head mounted display in which an image to be visually recognized by the user is not easily deformed even when focus adjustment is performed.
  • An image light generator capable of generating image light
  • An eyepiece optical system that includes a plurality of lenses that guide the image light generated by the image light generation unit in a first direction, and is provided apart from the image light generation unit in the first direction;
  • the image light that is spaced apart from the eyepiece optical system in the first direction and that is provided on the opposite side of the image light generation unit with respect to the eyepiece optical system and that is guided by a plurality of lenses is different from the first direction.
  • a reflective member that reflects in two directions;
  • the image light generating unit and the reflecting member are fixedly supported, and the eyepiece optical system is supported to be reciprocally movable along the first direction with respect to the fixed image light generating unit and the reflecting member.
  • a member, An image display device comprising: a moving mechanism that reciprocates the eyepiece optical system along the first direction.
  • the image display device when performing the focus adjustment, moves the eyepiece optical system relative to the reflecting member and the image light generation unit along the first direction.
  • the image light generator is not fixed to the first direction because it remains fixed to the support member. Therefore, the image display apparatus can make it difficult to deform the image that is visually recognized by the user even when the focus adjustment is performed.
  • the support member includes a pair of guide portions that are provided apart from each other in the third direction intersecting the first direction and the second direction, and guide the eyepiece optical system along the first direction.
  • the eyepiece optical system may include a pair of sliding portions that slide along each of the pair of guide portions.
  • the image display apparatus can make it difficult to deform the image visually recognized by the user when performing the focus adjustment.
  • the support member includes a first groove portion provided at a position including a center in a third direction intersecting the first direction and the second direction, and extending along the first direction;
  • the eyepiece optical system may include a protrusion provided at a position including the center in the third direction, extending along the first direction, and engageable with the first groove.
  • the image display apparatus can further reduce the deformation of the image to be visually recognized by the user when performing the focus adjustment.
  • the support member is A first support member that supports the reflective member; A second support member that supports the image light generation unit and the eyepiece optical system; A fixing portion for fixing the first support member and the second support member; One of the first support member and the second support member is disposed on the direction side where the reflection member reflects the image light with respect to the other, The fixing portion may be disposed on the reflecting direction side of the support member.
  • the fixed portion arranged on the reflecting direction side of the support member is difficult to be seen by anyone other than the user when using the image display device. Therefore, the image display device can improve the appearance of the appearance.
  • One of the pair of guide portions includes a shaft member provided on the first support member and extending along the first direction, The other protrudes from the first support member in a direction intersecting the first direction, and includes a protrusion extending along the first direction.
  • One of the pair of sliding portions includes one or a plurality of holes into which the shaft member is inserted, The other may have a groove that fits into the protrusion.
  • the eyepiece optical system can reciprocate along the first direction simply by inserting the shaft member into the hole and fitting the protrusion into the groove. Therefore, the image display device can improve assemblability.
  • One of the pair of sliding portions includes a plurality of the hole portions spaced apart in the first direction, The groove may be arranged at a position between any of the plurality of holes in the first direction.
  • the groove can stably prevent the eyepiece optical system from rotating around the axis of the hole. Therefore, the image display device can stably move the eyepiece optical system back and forth.
  • the moving mechanism is A protrusion provided in the eyepiece optical system and protruding in a direction opposite to a direction in which the reflection member reflects the image light;
  • the protrusion has a cam groove that is inserted from the reflecting direction side, and a rotation member that is rotatably provided on the support member;
  • the cam groove extends spirally around the axis of the rotating member, One end side in the extending direction of the cam groove may be further away from the axis than the other end side.
  • the eye groove optical system can reciprocate by the cam groove reciprocating the protrusion along the first direction.
  • the user can reciprocate the eyepiece optical system simply by rotating the rotating member. Therefore, the image display apparatus can improve the operability of focus adjustment.
  • the cam groove has an angle on the cam groove side of 90 degrees or more and 180 degrees among angles formed by the plane including the one end and the axis in the extending direction and the plane including the other end and the axis. You may form so that it may become the following.
  • the rotating member rotates in the range of 90 degrees or more and 180 degrees or less. Since the rotation member can be rotated 90 degrees or more, the movement amount of the eyepiece optical system that moves per unit rotation amount of the rotation member is suppressed. Therefore, the user can finely adjust the moving amount of the eyepiece optical system by rotating the rotating member. Further, the rotating member does not rotate more than 180 degrees. Therefore, the user does not need to change the rotating member pinched with the finger when rotating the rotating member. Therefore, the HMD can further improve the focus adjustment operability.
  • the reflecting member includes a first region capable of reflecting the image light on a surface on the eyepiece optical system side,
  • the first region may include a second region in which the eyepiece optical system moved to a position closest to the reflecting member can irradiate the surface with the image light.
  • the region where the eyepiece optical system can irradiate the surface of the reflecting member is the largest when the eyepiece optical system is closest to the reflecting member. Since the first region includes the second region, the image light irradiated on the surface does not deviate from the first region regardless of the position of the eyepiece optical system. Therefore, the image display device can make the user visually recognize the image light image stably regardless of the position of the eyepiece optical system.
  • the image light generation unit and the eyepiece optical system are separated from the first state in which the relative distance in the first direction between the image light generation unit and the eyepiece optical system is closest to each other, and the relative distance is the farthest.
  • the one end portion in the first direction of the image light generation unit is the one side in the first direction in the first state than the other end portion in the first direction of the eyepiece optical system.
  • Placed in In the first state, the eyepiece optical system is an overlapping portion of the eyepiece optical system disposed on the other side in the first direction with respect to the end portion on the one side in the first direction of the image light generation unit.
  • the portion closest to the optical axis of the eyepiece optical system has at least one additional protrusion protruding in the direction intersecting the optical axis
  • the image light generation unit is an overlapping portion of the eyepiece optical system that is disposed on the one side in the first direction with respect to an end portion on the other side in the first direction of the eyepiece optical system.
  • at least one additional groove portion into which the at least one additional protrusion fits from the inside may be provided in a portion closest to the optical axis.
  • the positional relationship in the direction intersecting with the third direction is fixed by fitting at least one additional protrusion in at least one additional groove at the overlapping portion in the first direction between the image light generation unit and the eyepiece optical system. Is done. Therefore, when at least one of the image light generation unit and the eyepiece optical system moves in the first direction according to an operation on the operation member, the image light generation unit and the eyepiece optical system move in a direction intersecting the optical axis. Can be suppressed.
  • the at least one additional protrusion and the at least one additional groove are provided at positions close to the optical axis, so that the image light generation unit and the eyepiece optical system are appropriately prevented from moving in a direction intersecting the optical axis. it can.
  • the at least one additional protrusion has a pair of third protrusions provided on each of one side and the other side in a direction orthogonal to the optical axis of the overlapping portion of the eyepiece optical system
  • the at least one additional groove may include a pair of additional grooves provided on one side and the other side of the overlapping portion of the image light generation unit in a direction orthogonal to the optical axis.
  • the positional relationship in the direction intersecting the third direction is fixed on both sides of the overlapping portion in the first direction in the direction orthogonal to the first direction. Therefore, when at least one of the image light generation unit and the eyepiece optical system moves in the first direction according to an operation on the operation member, the image light generation unit and the eyepiece optical system move in a direction intersecting the optical axis. It can be suppressed appropriately.
  • the at least one additional protrusion is provided at a position including the center in the second direction of the eyepiece optical system,
  • the at least one additional groove may be provided at a position including the center in the second direction of the image light generation unit.
  • Still another aspect of the present disclosure is as follows: The image display device according to any one of the above (1) to (12); A wearing tool having a first portion extending in the first direction and a pair of second portions extending from both sides of the first portion to the one side in the second direction; A head mounted display comprising: a connection tool connected to the first portion of the wearing tool and connected to the image display device.
  • the first portion is curved in a convex shape toward the other side in the second direction,
  • the connector extends from the first portion along the third direction;
  • One end of the connection tool is connected to the wearing tool,
  • the image display device may be connected to the other end of the connector.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)

Abstract

The purpose of the present invention is to provide: an image display device which is capable of focus adjustment, and with which an increase in the size of a housing thereof in a vertical direction is reduced; and a head-mounted display (HMD). This HMD is provided with: an image unit (7) capable of generating image light; a lens unit (6) provided with a plurality of lenses; a housing (13, 14) which covers the image unit (7) and the lens unit (6); a half mirror (56) capable of deflecting rearward the image light generated by the image unit (7); a protrusion (65) provided to a rear side of the lens unit (6); a protrusion (64) provided to a front side of the lens unit (6); a groove (242) which is provided to an inside surface of a rear side of the housing, extends in a straight line from left to right, and supports the lens unit (6) such that the lens unit (6) is capable of moving in a left-right direction; an adjustment mechanism (4) provided with a cam groove which engages with the protrusion (64); and an operation member (3) which is connected to the adjustment mechanism (4) and provided to a front side of the housing, and which is capable of being operated by a user.

Description

画像表示装置及びヘッドマウントディスプレイImage display device and head mounted display
 本開示は、画像表示装置と、その画像表示装置を用いたヘッドマウントディスプレイに関する。 The present disclosure relates to an image display device and a head-mounted display using the image display device.
 従来、ピント調整を行うことが可能な画像表示装置が知られている。画像表示装置は、例えば、ヘッドマウントディスプレイ(以下、「HMD」という。)である。例えば、使用者の片側の眼に画像を提示する単眼型のHMDが知られている。公知のHMDにおいて、筐体内の液晶に表示された画像の光(以下、「画像光」という。)の光軸は、筐体の長手方向(以下、「左右方向」という。)と同一方向に延びる。画像光は、ハーフミラーによって後方に曲折され、使用者の片側の眼に入射される。HMDは、ピント調節を行うためのアジャスタを備える。アジャスタはリング状であり、光軸を支点として回動可能である。アジャスタの内側に、液晶を保持する液晶ホルダが配置される。アジャスタの内周面から内側に突出する係合部は、液晶ホルダの外周面に設けられた溝カムに嵌る。アジャスタの回動に応じ、液晶ホルダは光軸に沿って左右方向に移動する。この場合、筐体に固定されたレンズホルダに対する液晶ホルダの位置が左右方向に移動する。 Conventionally, an image display device capable of performing focus adjustment is known. The image display device is, for example, a head mounted display (hereinafter referred to as “HMD”). For example, a monocular HMD that presents an image to one eye of a user is known. In a known HMD, the optical axis of image light (hereinafter referred to as “image light”) displayed on the liquid crystal in the casing is in the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the casing (hereinafter referred to as “left-right direction”). Extend. The image light is bent backward by the half mirror and is incident on one eye of the user. The HMD includes an adjuster for performing focus adjustment. The adjuster is ring-shaped and can be rotated with the optical axis as a fulcrum. A liquid crystal holder for holding the liquid crystal is disposed inside the adjuster. The engaging portion that protrudes inward from the inner peripheral surface of the adjuster is fitted into a groove cam provided on the outer peripheral surface of the liquid crystal holder. In accordance with the rotation of the adjuster, the liquid crystal holder moves in the left-right direction along the optical axis. In this case, the position of the liquid crystal holder with respect to the lens holder fixed to the housing moves in the left-right direction.
特開2013-44828号公報JP 2013-44828 A
 上記のHMDの場合、アジャスタは液晶ホルダの外側に設けられる。このため、筐体における光軸を中心とした周方向の大きさは、アジャスタが設けられない場合と比べて大きくなる。筐体の周方向の大きさが大きい場合、筐体は、上下方向にも大きくなる。その結果、使用者の視野が筐体によって遮られる場合があるという問題点がある。 In the case of the above HMD, the adjuster is provided outside the liquid crystal holder. For this reason, the magnitude | size of the circumferential direction centering on the optical axis in a housing | casing becomes large compared with the case where an adjuster is not provided. When the circumferential size of the housing is large, the housing is also large in the vertical direction. As a result, there is a problem that the visual field of the user may be blocked by the housing.
 本発明の目的は、筐体の上下方向のサイズ増加を低減しつつピント調節が可能な画像表示装置、及び、ヘッドマウントディスプレイを提供することである。 An object of the present invention is to provide an image display device and a head mounted display capable of adjusting the focus while reducing an increase in the vertical size of the casing.
 本開示の一側面は、
 画像光を生成可能な画像ユニットと、
 複数のレンズを有し、前記画像ユニットに対して第1方向の一方側に配置され、その光軸が前記第1方向に延びるレンズユニットと、
 前記画像ユニット及び前記レンズユニットの少なくとも一部を覆う筐体と、
 前記筐体のうち、前記レンズユニットに対して前記第1方向の前記一方側に設けられた部材であって、前記レンズユニットによって導かれた前記画像光を、前記第1方向と直交する第2方向の一方側に偏向させることが可能な偏向部材と、
 前記画像ユニット及び前記レンズユニットの少なくとも一方の前記第2方向の前記一方側に設けられた第1係合部材と、
 前記画像ユニット及び前記レンズユニットの少なくとも一方の前記第2方向の他方側に設けられた第2係合部材と、
 前記筐体のうち、前記第2方向の前記一方側の部分の前記筐体内側面に設けられた部材であって、前記第1係合部材に係合して前記第1方向に移動可能に支持する第3係合部材と、
 前記第2係合部材に係合する部材であって、前記画像ユニットと前記レンズユニットとの前記第1方向の相対距離を変更可能な第4係合部材を有し、前記第2係合部材の前記第2方向の前記他方側に設けられた調節機構と、
 前記筐体のうち、前記第2方向の前記他方側に少なくとも設けられた部材であって、前記調節機構を使用者が操作可能な操作部材とを備える画像表示装置である。
One aspect of the present disclosure is:
An image unit capable of generating image light;
A lens unit having a plurality of lenses, disposed on one side in the first direction with respect to the image unit, and having an optical axis extending in the first direction;
A housing covering at least a part of the image unit and the lens unit;
Of the housing, a member provided on the one side in the first direction with respect to the lens unit, wherein the image light guided by the lens unit is secondly orthogonal to the first direction. A deflecting member capable of deflecting to one side of the direction;
A first engagement member provided on the one side in the second direction of at least one of the image unit and the lens unit;
A second engagement member provided on the other side in the second direction of at least one of the image unit and the lens unit;
Of the casing, a member provided on the inner side surface of the one side portion in the second direction, which is engaged with the first engaging member and supported so as to be movable in the first direction. A third engaging member that
A second engagement member that engages with the second engagement member, the fourth engagement member being capable of changing a relative distance between the image unit and the lens unit in the first direction; An adjustment mechanism provided on the other side of the second direction of
It is an image display device provided with an operation member that is provided at least on the other side in the second direction in the casing and that allows a user to operate the adjustment mechanism.
 画像表示装置において、画像ユニットとレンズユニットとの少なくとも一方の第1係合部材は、第2方向の一方側に設けられ、第2係合部材は、第2方向の他方側に設けられる。第1係合部材は、筐体の第3係合部材に係合し、筐体に対して第1方向に移動可能に支持される。第2係合部材は、調節機構の第4係合部材に係合し、操作部材に対する操作に応じて第1方向に移動する。これによって、画像ユニットとレンズユニットとの光軸に沿った方向の相対距離が変化し、ピント調節が行われる。 In the image display device, at least one first engagement member of the image unit and the lens unit is provided on one side in the second direction, and the second engagement member is provided on the other side in the second direction. The first engagement member engages with the third engagement member of the housing and is supported so as to be movable in the first direction with respect to the housing. The second engagement member engages with the fourth engagement member of the adjustment mechanism, and moves in the first direction in response to an operation on the operation member. As a result, the relative distance in the direction along the optical axis between the image unit and the lens unit changes, and focus adjustment is performed.
 筐体の第1方向が左右方向を向き、第2方向の一方側が使用者に対向した状態で、画像表示装置が使用者に装着される場合を例に挙げる。この場合、画像ユニットとレンズユニットとの相対距離を変化させてピント調節を行うための部材である、第1係合部材、第2係合部材、第3係合部材、及び、第4係合部材は、使用者に対して前後方向(第2方向)に配置され、上下方向(第3方向)に配置されない。このため、画像表示装置は、使用者に装着された状態で上下方向の大きさを抑制できる。従って、画像表示装置は、ユーザによるピント調節を可能としつつ、筐体の上下方向の大きさが増加することを低減できる。 As an example, a case where the image display device is attached to the user in a state where the first direction of the housing faces the left-right direction and one side of the second direction faces the user will be described. In this case, the first engagement member, the second engagement member, the third engagement member, and the fourth engagement, which are members for adjusting the focus by changing the relative distance between the image unit and the lens unit. A member is arrange | positioned with respect to a user in the front-back direction (2nd direction), and is not arrange | positioned in an up-down direction (3rd direction). For this reason, the image display apparatus can suppress the size in the vertical direction while being worn by the user. Therefore, the image display apparatus can reduce the increase in the size of the casing in the vertical direction while allowing the user to adjust the focus.
 前記筐体は、前記画像ユニットと前記偏向部材との間の距離を固定して保持し、
 前記第1係合部材及び前記第2係合部材は、前記レンズユニットに設けられ、前記画像ユニットに設けられなくてもよい。
The housing holds a fixed distance between the image unit and the deflection member,
The first engaging member and the second engaging member may be provided in the lens unit and may not be provided in the image unit.
 この場合、操作部材に対する操作に応じ、レンズユニットは調節機構によって第1方向に移動する。これによって画像ユニットとの相対距離は変化し、ピント調節が行われる。レンズユニットは、外部からの電気的制御が不要であるので、電気信号を伝達するための信号線が接続されない。このため、画像表示装置は、レンズユニットを左右方向にスムーズに移動させることができる。 In this case, the lens unit is moved in the first direction by the adjusting mechanism according to the operation on the operation member. As a result, the relative distance to the image unit changes and focus adjustment is performed. Since the lens unit does not require external electrical control, a signal line for transmitting an electrical signal is not connected. For this reason, the image display apparatus can smoothly move the lens unit in the left-right direction.
 前記第1係合部材は、前記第2方向の前記一方側に突出する第1突出部を有してもよい。 The first engagement member may have a first protrusion that protrudes toward the one side in the second direction.
 この場合、第1係合部材及び第3係合部材によって筐体が第3方向に大きくなることを適切に抑制できる。従って、画像表示装置は、画像ユニット又はレンズユニットを第1方向に適切に移動させることができる。 In this case, the first engagement member and the third engagement member can appropriately suppress the housing from becoming larger in the third direction. Therefore, the image display apparatus can appropriately move the image unit or the lens unit in the first direction.
 前記第1突出部の前記第1方向の長さは、前記第1方向及び前記第2方向と直交する第3方向の長さよりも長くてもよい。 The length of the first protrusion in the first direction may be longer than the length of the third direction orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction.
 この場合、画像表示装置は、操作部材に対する操作が行われた場合に、画像ユニット又はレンズユニットが第2方向に延びる軸を支点として回転することを抑制できる。従って、画像表示装置は、画像ユニット又はレンズユニットを第1方向に移動させることによるピント調節を適切に実行できる。 In this case, the image display device can prevent the image unit or the lens unit from rotating about the axis extending in the second direction when the operation member is operated. Therefore, the image display apparatus can appropriately perform focus adjustment by moving the image unit or the lens unit in the first direction.
 また、前記第3係合部材は、前記第1方向に延び且つ前記第1突出部が嵌る第1溝部を有してもよい。 Further, the third engaging member may have a first groove portion that extends in the first direction and into which the first protruding portion is fitted.
 第1溝部は、第1突出部が第1方向以外の方向に移動することを規制できる。 The first groove portion can restrict the first protrusion from moving in a direction other than the first direction.
 また、前記第3係合部材は、前記第1方向に延び且つ前記第1突出部に挿通される軸部材を有してもよい。軸部材が挿通された第1突出部が、第1方向以外の方向に移動することを規制できる。 The third engagement member may include a shaft member that extends in the first direction and is inserted through the first protrusion. It can restrict | limit that the 1st protrusion part by which the shaft member was penetrated moves to directions other than a 1st direction.
 前記第1突出部は、前記画像ユニット及び前記レンズユニットの少なくとも一方の前記第2方向の前記一方側のうち、前記第3方向の中心を含む位置に設けられ、
 前記第2係合部材は、前記画像ユニット及び前記レンズユニットの少なくとも一方の前記第2方向の前記他方側のうち、前記第3方向の中心を含む位置に設けられ、
 前記第3係合部材は、前記筐体の前記第2方向の前記一方側の部分の前記筐体内側面のうち、前記第3方向の中心を含む位置に設けられてもよい。
The first projecting portion is provided at a position including the center in the third direction among the one side in the second direction of at least one of the image unit and the lens unit,
The second engagement member is provided at a position including a center in the third direction among the other side in the second direction of at least one of the image unit and the lens unit,
The third engagement member may be provided at a position including a center in the third direction on an inner surface of the casing at the one side portion in the second direction of the casing.
 画像表示装置が第3方向の一方側を上にした状態で使用者に装着された場合と、第3方向の他方側を上にした状態で使用者に装着された場合とで、画像ユニット及びレンズユニットに加わる重力の向きが変化する。これに対して、画像表示装置は、画像ユニット及びレンズユニットに加わる重力の向きが変化した場合でも、画像ユニット及びレンズユニットを水平に維持できる。 When the image display device is attached to the user with one side in the third direction up, and when the image display device is attached to the user with the other side in the third direction up The direction of gravity applied to the lens unit changes. On the other hand, the image display apparatus can maintain the image unit and the lens unit horizontally even when the direction of gravity applied to the image unit and the lens unit is changed.
 また、前記第1突出部は、前記画像ユニット及び前記レンズユニットの少なくとも一方の前記第2方向の前記一方側のうち、前記第3方向に離間して設けられる2つの摺動部を有し、
 前記第3係合部材は、前記2つの摺動部に対応して2つ設けられ、
 前記第3係合部材は、前記筐体の前記第2方向の前記一方側の部分の前記筐体内側面のうち、前記第3方向の中心を含む位置に設けられてもよい。
In addition, the first projecting portion has two sliding portions provided apart from each other in the third direction among the one side of the second direction of at least one of the image unit and the lens unit,
Two third engagement members are provided corresponding to the two sliding portions,
The third engagement member may be provided at a position including a center in the third direction on an inner surface of the casing at the one side portion in the second direction of the casing.
 前記第2係合部材は、前記画像ユニット及び前記レンズユニットの少なくとも一方の前記第2方向の前記他方側に突出する第2突出部を有し、
 前記第4係合部材は、前記第2突出部が嵌る渦巻き状の第2溝部を有してもよい。
The second engaging member has a second projecting portion projecting to the other side in the second direction of at least one of the image unit and the lens unit,
The fourth engagement member may have a spiral second groove portion into which the second protrusion fits.
 この場合、第2係合部材及び第4係合部材によって筐体が第3方向に大きくなることを適切に抑制できる。又、操作部材を回転させる操作に応じ、第2溝部に沿って第2突出部を移動させることによって、画像ユニット及びレンズユニットの少なくとも一方を第1方向に移動させ、双方間の相対距離を変化させることができる。 In this case, the second engagement member and the fourth engagement member can appropriately suppress the housing from becoming larger in the third direction. In addition, by moving the second protrusion along the second groove according to the operation of rotating the operation member, at least one of the image unit and the lens unit is moved in the first direction, and the relative distance between the two is changed. Can be made.
 前記画像ユニットと前記レンズユニットとは、前記画像ユニットと前記レンズユニットとの間の前記第1方向の前記相対距離が最も近接した第1状態と、前記相対距離が最も離間した第2状態との間で移動可能に前記筐体に保持され、
 前記画像ユニットの前記第1方向の前記一方側の端部は、前記第1状態において、前記レンズユニットの前記第1方向の前記他方側の端部よりも、前記第1方向の前記一方側に配置され、
 前記レンズユニットは、前記第1状態において、前記画像ユニットの前記第1方向の前記一方側の端部よりも前記第1方向の前記他方側に配置されるレンズユニット重複部分のうち、前記光軸に最も近接する部分に、前記光軸と交差する方向に突出する少なくとも1つの第3突出部を有し、
 前記画像ユニットは、前記第1状態において、前記レンズユニットの前記第1方向の前記他方側の端部よりも前記第1方向の前記一方側に配置される画像ユニット重複部分のうち、前記光軸に最も近接する部分に、前記少なくとも1つの第3突出部が内側から嵌まる少なくとも1つの第3溝部を有してもよい。
The image unit and the lens unit include a first state in which the relative distance in the first direction between the image unit and the lens unit is the closest, and a second state in which the relative distance is the most separated. Held in the housing movably between,
The one end of the image unit in the first direction is closer to the one side in the first direction than the other end of the lens unit in the first direction in the first state. Arranged,
In the first state, the lens unit has the optical axis in the overlapping portion of the lens unit disposed on the other side in the first direction with respect to the end on the one side in the first direction of the image unit. At least one third projecting portion projecting in a direction intersecting the optical axis,
In the first state, the image unit has the optical axis in the overlapping portion of the image unit arranged on the one side in the first direction with respect to the end on the other side in the first direction of the lens unit. The at least one third projecting portion may have at least one third groove portion that fits from the inside in a portion that is closest to.
 この場合、画像ユニットとレンズユニットとの第1方向の重複部分で、少なくとも1つの第3突出部が少なくとも1つの第3溝部に嵌ることによって、第3方向と交差する方向の位置関係が固定される。従って、操作部材に対する操作に応じて画像ユニット及びレンズユニットの少なくとも一方が第1方向に移動したときに、画像ユニット及びレンズユニットが光軸と交差する方向に移動することを抑制できる。なお、少なくとも1つの第3突出部及び少なくとも1つの第3溝部は、光軸に近接する位置に設けられるので、画像ユニット及びレンズユニットが光軸と交差する方向に移動することを適切に抑制できる。 In this case, at least one third protrusion fits into at least one third groove at the overlapping portion in the first direction between the image unit and the lens unit, so that the positional relationship in the direction intersecting the third direction is fixed. The Therefore, when at least one of the image unit and the lens unit moves in the first direction according to an operation on the operation member, it is possible to suppress the image unit and the lens unit from moving in a direction intersecting the optical axis. In addition, since at least one 3rd protrusion part and at least 1 3rd groove part are provided in the position close | similar to an optical axis, it can suppress appropriately that an image unit and a lens unit move to the direction which cross | intersects an optical axis. .
 前記少なくとも1つの第3突出部は、前記レンズユニット重複部分の前記光軸と直交する方向の一方側と他方側とのそれぞれに設けられた一対の第3突出部を有し、
 前記少なくとも1つの第3溝部は、前記画像ユニット重複部分の前記光軸と直交する方向の一方側と他方側とのそれぞれに設けられた一対の第3溝部を有してもよい。
The at least one third protrusion has a pair of third protrusions provided on each of one side and the other side of the lens unit overlapping portion in a direction orthogonal to the optical axis,
The at least one third groove portion may include a pair of third groove portions provided on each of one side and the other side of the image unit overlapping portion in a direction orthogonal to the optical axis.
 この場合、画像ユニットとレンズユニットとは、それぞれの第1方向の重複部分の第1方向と直交する方向の両側で、第3方向と交差する方向の位置関係が固定される。従って、操作部材に対する操作に応じて画像ユニット及びレンズユニットの少なくとも一方が第1方向に移動したときに、画像ユニット及びレンズユニットが光軸と交差する方向に移動することを適切に抑制できる。 In this case, the positional relationship between the image unit and the lens unit in the direction intersecting the third direction is fixed on both sides of the overlapping portion in the first direction in the direction orthogonal to the first direction. Therefore, when at least one of the image unit and the lens unit moves in the first direction according to an operation on the operation member, it is possible to appropriately suppress the image unit and the lens unit from moving in a direction intersecting the optical axis.
 前記少なくとも1つの第3突出部は、前記レンズユニットの前記第2方向の中心を含む位置に設けられ、
 前記少なくとも1つの第3溝部は、前記画像ユニットの前記第2方向の中心を含む位置に設けられてもよい。
The at least one third protrusion is provided at a position including the center of the lens unit in the second direction,
The at least one third groove may be provided at a position including a center of the image unit in the second direction.
 この場合、操作部材に対する操作に応じて画像ユニット及びレンズユニットの少なくとも一方が第1方向に移動したときに、画像ユニット及びレンズユニットが第2方向に移動することを適切に抑制できる。 In this case, when at least one of the image unit and the lens unit moves in the first direction according to the operation on the operation member, it is possible to appropriately suppress the image unit and the lens unit from moving in the second direction.
 前記筐体は、
 前記第2方向の前記一方側に第1筐体を有し、
 前記第2方向の前記他方側に第2筐体を有し、
 前記画像ユニット及び前記レンズユニットは前記第1筐体に保持され、
 前記操作部材は前記第2筐体に保持されてもよい。
The housing is
A first housing on the one side in the second direction;
A second housing on the other side in the second direction;
The image unit and the lens unit are held in the first housing,
The operation member may be held by the second housing.
 筐体の第1方向が左右方向を向き、第2方向の一方側が使用者に対向した状態で、画像表示装置が使用者に装着される場合を例に挙げる。この場合、使用者側に近接して配置される第1筐体に、画像ユニット及びレンズユニットが保持される。装着部材等によって画像表示装置を使用者の頭部に固定する場合であって、第1筐体に装着部材が接続される場合、画像ユニット及びレンズユニットは、使用者の頭部に適切に固定される。 As an example, a case where the image display device is attached to the user in a state where the first direction of the housing faces the left-right direction and one side of the second direction faces the user will be described. In this case, the image unit and the lens unit are held in the first housing that is arranged close to the user side. When the image display device is fixed to the user's head by a mounting member or the like, and the mounting member is connected to the first housing, the image unit and the lens unit are appropriately fixed to the user's head. Is done.
 前記画像ユニットのうち前記第2方向の前記他方側に、同一平面上に配置される複数の端部を含む平面部を備えてもよい。 A plane portion including a plurality of end portions arranged on the same plane may be provided on the other side of the second direction in the image unit.
 この場合、平面部を土台として画像ユニットを台等に容易に載置させ易くなる。このため、画像ユニットを筐体に組み付けて画像表示装置を製造する場合に、画像ユニットを安定化させることができる。これによって、画像表示装置の製造を容易化できる。 In this case, the image unit can be easily placed on a table or the like using the flat surface as a base. For this reason, the image unit can be stabilized when the image display apparatus is manufactured by assembling the image unit in the housing. Thereby, manufacture of an image display apparatus can be facilitated.
 本開示の他の側面は、
 上記した画像表示装置と、
 前記第1方向に延びる第1部分、及び、前記第1部分の両側から前記第2方向の前記一方側に延びる一対の第2部分を有する装着具と、
 前記装着具の前記第1部分に接続され、前記画像表示装置が接続された接続具と、
 を備えたことを特徴とするヘッドマウントディスプレイである。
Other aspects of the disclosure include
An image display device as described above;
A wearing tool having a first portion extending in the first direction and a pair of second portions extending from both sides of the first portion to the one side in the second direction;
A connection tool connected to the first part of the wearing tool and connected to the image display device;
It is the head mounted display characterized by having provided.
 また、
 前記第一部分は、前記第2方向の前記他方側に向けて凸状に湾曲し、
 前記接続具は、前記第1部分から前記第3方向に沿って延び、
 前記接続具の一端が、前記装着具に接続され、
 前記接続具の他端が、前記画像表示装置が接続されてもよい。
Also,
The first portion is curved in a convex shape toward the other side in the second direction,
The connector extends from the first portion along the third direction;
One end of the connection tool is connected to the wearing tool,
The image display device may be connected to the other end of the connection tool.
HMD1を取り付けた眼鏡型フレーム91の斜視図である。It is a perspective view of the spectacles type frame 91 which attached HMD1. HMD1の平面図である。It is a top view of HMD1. 図2のI-I線矢視方向断面図である。FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II in FIG. 2. 左斜め前方から見たHMD1の分解斜視図である。It is a disassembled perspective view of HMD1 seen from the left diagonal front. 左斜め後方から見た接眼光学系130およびアジャスタ70の斜視図である。3 is a perspective view of an eyepiece optical system 130 and an adjuster 70 as viewed from the left diagonally rear. FIG. HMD1の背面図である。It is a rear view of HMD1. 左斜め前方から見た第2筐体30の斜視図である。It is a perspective view of the 2nd case 30 seen from the left diagonal front. 接眼光学系130が最も左側に配置された状態を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the state by which the eyepiece optical system 130 is arrange | positioned at the leftmost side. 接眼光学系130が最も右側に配置された状態を示す図である。る。It is a figure which shows the state by which the eyepiece optical system 130 is arrange | positioned at the rightmost side. The 接眼光学系130が最も左側に配置された状態において、カム溝76と突出部136との位置関係を示す図である。FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a positional relationship between a cam groove and a protrusion 136 in a state where the eyepiece optical system is disposed on the leftmost side. 接眼光学系130が最も右側に配置された状態において、カム溝76と突出部136との位置関係を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the positional relationship of the cam groove 76 and the protrusion part 136 in the state by which the eyepiece optical system 130 is arrange | positioned at the rightmost side. HMD101の斜視図である。It is a perspective view of HMD101. 本体部材11の斜視図である。3 is a perspective view of a main body member 11. FIG. 本体部材11の左側面図である。3 is a left side view of the main body member 11. FIG. 筐体12の斜視図である。3 is a perspective view of a housing 12. FIG. 前側筐体13を後方から見た図である。It is the figure which looked at the front case 13 from back. 本体部材11内の分解斜視図である。FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view inside the main body member 11. 画像ユニット7の左側面図である。6 is a left side view of the image unit 7. FIG. レンズユニット6の斜視図である。2 is a perspective view of a lens unit 6. FIG. レンズユニット6の右側面図である。4 is a right side view of the lens unit 6. FIG. 調節機構4の背面図である。6 is a rear view of the adjustment mechanism 4. FIG. ホルダ5の斜視図である。7 is a perspective view of a holder 5. FIG. ホルダ5の斜視図である。7 is a perspective view of a holder 5. FIG. ホルダ5及びハーフミラー56が筐体12から取り外された状態を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the state from which the holder 5 and the half mirror 56 were removed from the housing | casing 12. FIG. ホルダ5及びハーフミラー56が筐体12に装着された状態を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the state in which the holder 5 and the half mirror 56 were mounted | worn with the housing | casing 12. FIG. 第1状態における、レンズユニット6、画像ユニット7、操作部材3、及び、調節機構4の斜視図である。It is a perspective view of the lens unit 6, the image unit 7, the operation member 3, and the adjustment mechanism 4 in a 1st state. 第2状態における、レンズユニット6、画像ユニット7、操作部材3、及び、調節機構4の斜視図である。It is a perspective view of the lens unit 6, the image unit 7, the operation member 3, and the adjustment mechanism 4 in a 2nd state. 本体部材11の左側面図である。3 is a left side view of the main body member 11. FIG. 変形例におけるHMD1の本体部材11Aの斜視図である。It is a perspective view of main body member 11A of HMD1 in a modification.
<第1実施形態>
 以下、本開示の一実施形態であるHMD1について、図面を参照して説明する。以下の説明において、図1の左斜め上方、右斜め下方、左斜め下方、右斜め上方、左方、及び右方を、夫々、HMD1の上方、下方、前方、後方、左方、及び右方とする。
<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, HMD1 which is one embodiment of this indication is explained with reference to drawings. In the following description, the upper left, lower, front, rear, left, and right of the HMD 1 are respectively defined as the upper left, lower right, lower left, lower right, upper left, left, and right in FIG. And
 先ず、HMD1の概要について説明する。HMD1は、光学透過型のシースルーHMDである。使用者の眼前の景色の光は、ハーフミラー80(図2参照、後述)を透過することによって使用者の眼に直接導かれる。HMD1の投影形式は虚像投影型である。液晶表示装置126(図3参照、後述)に表示した画像の光は、ハーフミラー80を反射することによって使用者の眼に導かれる。これらによってHMD1は、使用者に対して、眼前の景色に作成した画像を重ねて認識させることができる。 First, an outline of the HMD 1 will be described. The HMD 1 is an optically transmissive see-through HMD. The light of the scenery in front of the user's eyes is directly guided to the eyes of the user by passing through the half mirror 80 (see FIG. 2, described later). The projection format of HMD1 is a virtual image projection type. The light of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 126 (see FIG. 3, described later) is guided to the user's eyes by reflecting the half mirror 80. With these, the HMD 1 can make the user recognize the image created on the scene in front of the eyes in an overlapping manner.
(1)筐体10(第1筐体20、第3筐体40)
 図1に示すように、HMD1は筐体10を備える。筐体10は、支持部材の一例である。筐体10は、左右方向に延びる中空の直方体形状を有する。筐体10は、樹脂部材により形成されている。筐体10は、眼鏡型フレーム91に着脱可能に取り付けられる。眼鏡型フレーム91は使用者の頭部に装着される装着具の一例である。眼鏡型フレーム91は、左フレーム部92、右フレーム部93、中央フレーム部94、およびHMD支持部96を備えている。左フレーム部92は使用者の左耳に掛けられる。右フレーム部93は使用者の右耳に掛けられる。第1部分の一例である中央フレーム部94は、左フレーム部92の前端部と、右フレーム部93の前端部との間で左右方向に延びる。左フレーム部92及び右フレーム部93は、中央フレーム94の両側から、それぞれ後方に延びる。中央フレーム部94は、長手方向中央部に一対の鼻当て部95(図1では一方のみ図示)を備えている。接続具の一例であるHMD支持部96は、中央フレーム部94の上面右端側に設けられている。HMD支持部96は下方延出部98を備えている。下方延出部98は上下方向に延びている。下方延出部98には、ノコギリ状の凹凸を有する歯部(図示略)が上下方向に複数設けられている。
(1) Housing 10 (first housing 20 and third housing 40)
As shown in FIG. 1, the HMD 1 includes a housing 10. The housing 10 is an example of a support member. The housing 10 has a hollow rectangular parallelepiped shape extending in the left-right direction. The housing 10 is formed of a resin member. The housing | casing 10 is attached to the spectacles type flame | frame 91 so that attachment or detachment is possible. The eyeglass-type frame 91 is an example of a wearing tool worn on the user's head. The eyeglass-type frame 91 includes a left frame portion 92, a right frame portion 93, a central frame portion 94, and an HMD support portion 96. The left frame part 92 is hung on the left ear of the user. The right frame portion 93 is hung on the user's right ear. The central frame portion 94, which is an example of the first portion, extends in the left-right direction between the front end portion of the left frame portion 92 and the front end portion of the right frame portion 93. The left frame portion 92 and the right frame portion 93 extend rearward from both sides of the central frame 94, respectively. The center frame portion 94 includes a pair of nose pads 95 (only one is shown in FIG. 1) at the center in the longitudinal direction. The HMD support portion 96 that is an example of a connection tool is provided on the upper right end side of the center frame portion 94. The HMD support part 96 includes a downward extension part 98. The downward extending portion 98 extends in the vertical direction. The downward extending portion 98 is provided with a plurality of tooth portions (not shown) having saw-like irregularities in the vertical direction.
 図2に示すように、眼鏡型フレーム91に対向する筐体10の後面には、被保持部49が設けられている。被保持部49は、上下方向に延びる溝49Aを備える。溝49Aには下方延出部98(図1参照)が嵌められる。溝49Aの底部には板バネ(図示外)が設けられている。板バネは、下方延出部98に設けられた歯部の何れかに係止する。これによって、HMD1の上下方向の位置決めが可能となる。 As shown in FIG. 2, a held portion 49 is provided on the rear surface of the housing 10 facing the spectacle frame 91. The held portion 49 includes a groove 49A extending in the vertical direction. A downward extending portion 98 (see FIG. 1) is fitted in the groove 49A. A leaf spring (not shown) is provided at the bottom of the groove 49A. The leaf spring is locked to one of the tooth portions provided in the downward extending portion 98. As a result, the HMD 1 can be positioned in the vertical direction.
 筐体10は、第1筐体20、第2筐体30、および第3筐体40を備える。図3および図4に示すように、第1筐体20は、中空の直方体状である。第1筐体20には、左側開口部21、右側開口部23、および後側開口部22が設けられる。左側開口部21は、第1筐体20の左壁部21Aに設けられる。左側開口部21は、左壁部21Aを左右方向に貫通する。右側開口部23は、第1筐体20の右壁部23Aに設けられる。右側開口部23は、右壁部23Aを左右方向に貫通する。後側開口部22は、第1筐体20の後壁部(図示外)に設けられる。後側開口部22は、後壁部を前後方向に貫通する。第2筐体30は、後側開口部22を閉塞するように、第1筐体20の後壁部に固定される。第2筐体30の構成の詳細は後述する。第3筐体40は、右側開口部23を閉塞するように、第1筐体20の右壁部23Aに固定される。第3筐体40の右側面の上側および下側には、夫々、挿通孔41(図1参照)が設けられる。上側の挿通孔41は、右壁部23Aのうち右側開口部23の上側に設けられるネジ孔23B(図3参照)に対応する。上側の挿通孔41に第3筐体40の右方から挿通されたネジ42が、ネジ孔23Bに締め付けられることで、第3筐体40の上側部は、第1筐体20に固定される。下側の挿通孔41は、右壁部23Aのうち右側開口部23の下側に設けられるネジ孔(図示外)に対応する。下側の挿通孔41に第3筐体40の右方から挿通されたネジ(図示外)が、右壁部23Aのネジ孔に締め付けられることで、第3筐体40の下側部は、第1筐体20に固定される。さらに、第1筐体20の左壁部21Aには、ハーフミラー80が固定される。ハーフミラー80の構成の詳細は後述する。 The housing 10 includes a first housing 20, a second housing 30, and a third housing 40. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the first housing 20 has a hollow rectangular parallelepiped shape. The first housing 20 is provided with a left opening 21, a right opening 23, and a rear opening 22. The left opening 21 is provided in the left wall 21 </ b> A of the first housing 20. The left opening 21 penetrates the left wall 21A in the left-right direction. The right opening 23 is provided in the right wall 23 </ b> A of the first housing 20. The right opening 23 penetrates the right wall 23A in the left-right direction. The rear opening 22 is provided on the rear wall (not shown) of the first housing 20. The rear opening 22 penetrates the rear wall portion in the front-rear direction. The second housing 30 is fixed to the rear wall portion of the first housing 20 so as to close the rear opening 22. Details of the configuration of the second housing 30 will be described later. The third housing 40 is fixed to the right wall portion 23A of the first housing 20 so as to close the right opening 23. Insertion holes 41 (see FIG. 1) are provided on the upper side and the lower side of the right side surface of the third housing 40, respectively. The upper insertion hole 41 corresponds to a screw hole 23B (see FIG. 3) provided on the upper side of the right opening 23 in the right wall 23A. A screw 42 inserted from the right side of the third housing 40 into the upper insertion hole 41 is fastened to the screw hole 23 </ b> B, whereby the upper portion of the third housing 40 is fixed to the first housing 20. . The lower insertion hole 41 corresponds to a screw hole (not shown) provided on the lower side of the right opening 23 in the right wall portion 23A. A screw (not shown) inserted from the right side of the third housing 40 into the lower insertion hole 41 is tightened into the screw hole of the right wall portion 23A, so that the lower side portion of the third housing 40 is It is fixed to the first housing 20. Further, the half mirror 80 is fixed to the left wall portion 21 </ b> A of the first housing 20. Details of the configuration of the half mirror 80 will be described later.
(2)制御基板110、液晶ユニット120、接眼光学系130
 図3に示すように、筐体10の内部には、右方から左方へ向かって順に、制御基板110、液晶ユニット120、および接眼光学系130が収容される。制御基板110は、通信線(図示外)を介して接続する外部機器(図示外)から画像データを取得する。液晶ユニット120は、制御基板110が受信する画像データに基づいて、画像光を生成する。接眼光学系130は複数のレンズ(図示外)を有する。複数のレンズは、液晶ユニット120が生成した画像光を右方から左方へ導く。接眼光学系130はハーフミラー80の右方に位置する。接眼光学系130によって導かれる画像光の少なくとも一部は、ハーフミラー80によって後方へ反射される。以下の説明では、左右方向を「第1方向」ともいい、前後方向を「第2方向」ともいう。また、以下の説明では、ハーフミラー80によって反射される画像光の進行方向(ハーフミラー80が画像光を反射する方向)を、「反射方向」ともいう。
(2) Control board 110, liquid crystal unit 120, eyepiece optical system 130
As shown in FIG. 3, the control board 110, the liquid crystal unit 120, and the eyepiece optical system 130 are accommodated in the housing 10 in order from the right to the left. The control board 110 acquires image data from an external device (not shown) connected via a communication line (not shown). The liquid crystal unit 120 generates image light based on the image data received by the control board 110. The eyepiece optical system 130 has a plurality of lenses (not shown). The plurality of lenses guide the image light generated by the liquid crystal unit 120 from right to left. The eyepiece optical system 130 is located on the right side of the half mirror 80. At least a part of the image light guided by the eyepiece optical system 130 is reflected backward by the half mirror 80. In the following description, the left-right direction is also referred to as “first direction”, and the front-rear direction is also referred to as “second direction”. In the following description, the traveling direction of the image light reflected by the half mirror 80 (the direction in which the half mirror 80 reflects the image light) is also referred to as “reflection direction”.
 図4に示すように、液晶ユニット120は、液晶ホルダ121、液晶表示装置126、および液晶基板127(図3参照)を備える。液晶ホルダ121は、支持壁部122、前側壁部123、および後側壁部124を備える。支持壁部122は、平面視で前後方向に長い略矩形状の板状部材である。前側壁部123および後側壁部124は、夫々、正面視で上下方向に長い略矩形状の板状部材である。前側壁部123は、支持壁部122の前端部から上方へ向かって立設する。後側壁部124は、支持壁部122の後端部から上方へ向かって立設する。液晶表示装置126は、略直方体状である。液晶表示装置126は、支持壁部122によって下側から支持され、前側壁部123および後側壁部124によって挟持される。これにより、液晶表示装置126は、液晶ホルダ121によって保持される。液晶基板127は、液晶表示装置126の制御を司る基板であり、液晶表示装置126の右側に固定される。液晶基板127は、フレキシブルプリント基板(Flexible printed circuits、FPC)128(図3参照)を介して制御基板110(図3参照)と接続
されている。なお、後側壁部124は、ネジ34B(図6参照)で第2筐体30に固定される。つまり、第2筐体30は、液晶ユニット120を固定して支持する。なお、液晶ユニット120の代わりに、DMD、有機EL等の二次元表示素子が用いられてもよい。または、2次元的に走査された光を使用者の網膜上に投影する網膜走査型の投影装置(Retinal Scanning Display)も適用可能である。
As shown in FIG. 4, the liquid crystal unit 120 includes a liquid crystal holder 121, a liquid crystal display device 126, and a liquid crystal substrate 127 (see FIG. 3). The liquid crystal holder 121 includes a support wall 122, a front side wall 123, and a rear side wall 124. The support wall 122 is a substantially rectangular plate-like member that is long in the front-rear direction in plan view. The front side wall 123 and the rear side wall 124 are respectively substantially rectangular plate-like members that are long in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. The front side wall 123 is erected upward from the front end of the support wall 122. The rear side wall portion 124 is erected upward from the rear end portion of the support wall portion 122. The liquid crystal display device 126 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The liquid crystal display device 126 is supported from below by the support wall 122 and is sandwiched between the front side wall 123 and the rear side wall 124. Thereby, the liquid crystal display device 126 is held by the liquid crystal holder 121. The liquid crystal substrate 127 is a substrate that controls the liquid crystal display device 126 and is fixed to the right side of the liquid crystal display device 126. The liquid crystal substrate 127 is connected to the control substrate 110 (see FIG. 3) via a flexible printed circuit (FPC) 128 (see FIG. 3). The rear side wall portion 124 is fixed to the second housing 30 with screws 34B (see FIG. 6). That is, the second housing 30 fixes and supports the liquid crystal unit 120. In place of the liquid crystal unit 120, a two-dimensional display element such as DMD or organic EL may be used. Alternatively, a retinal scanning type projection device (Retinal Scanning Display) that projects two-dimensionally scanned light onto the retina of the user is also applicable.
(3)接眼光学系130
 接眼光学系130は、第2筐体30によって第1方向に往復移動可能に支持されている。接眼光学系130は、レンズホルダ131を備える。レンズホルダ131は略四角筒状である。図5に示すように、レンズホルダ131には、傾斜部132~135が設けられる。傾斜部132~135は、夫々、レンズホルダ131の後側上部、後側下部、前側下部および前側上部が、左右方向に亘って面取りされた平面状の部位である。レンズホルダ131の内側には、複数のレンズ(図示略)が固定されている。複数のレンズの夫々の光軸は、レンズホルダ131の中心を左右方向に延びる軸線上に配置されている。
(3) Eyepiece optical system 130
The eyepiece optical system 130 is supported by the second housing 30 so as to be reciprocally movable in the first direction. The eyepiece optical system 130 includes a lens holder 131. The lens holder 131 has a substantially rectangular tube shape. As shown in FIG. 5, the lens holder 131 is provided with inclined portions 132 to 135. The inclined portions 132 to 135 are planar portions in which the rear upper portion, rear lower portion, front lower portion, and front upper portion of the lens holder 131 are chamfered in the left-right direction. A plurality of lenses (not shown) are fixed inside the lens holder 131. The optical axes of the plurality of lenses are arranged on an axis extending in the left-right direction at the center of the lens holder 131.
 図4に示すように、レンズホルダ131の前側面131Aには、突出部136が設けられる。突出部136は、円柱状に形成され、前側面131Aから前方へ向かって突出している。言い換えると、突出部136は、反射方向と反対方向(以下、反対方向という)へ向かって突出している。突出部136は後述するカム溝76(図5参照)に、後方から挿入されている。レンズホルダ131が備える一対の摺動部146(図5参照)については後述する。 As shown in FIG. 4, a protrusion 136 is provided on the front side 131 </ b> A of the lens holder 131. The protruding portion 136 is formed in a columnar shape and protrudes forward from the front side surface 131A. In other words, the protrusion 136 protrudes in the direction opposite to the reflection direction (hereinafter referred to as the opposite direction). The protrusion 136 is inserted into the cam groove 76 (see FIG. 5) described later from the rear. A pair of sliding portions 146 (see FIG. 5) included in the lens holder 131 will be described later.
(4)ハーフミラー80
 ハーフミラー80は、第1筐体20の左壁部21Aのうち左側開口部21の前側部に固定される板状部材である。言い換えると、第1筐体20は、ハーフミラー80を固定し支持する。ハーフミラー80は、例えば、アクリルやポリカーボネートなどの透明樹脂や、光学ガラスなどで形成されてよい。ハーフミラー80は、第1板状部85および第2板状部88を備える。第1板状部85は、左側面視で上下方向に長い略矩形状である。第2板状部88は、第1板状部85の後端部から左斜め後方に延びる。第1板状部85には、上方から下方へ向かって順に、丸孔81、挿通孔82、および長孔83が設けられる。丸孔81および長孔83は、夫々、左壁部21Aから左方に向けて突出する円柱状の突起部(図示外)が挿入されている。挿通孔82は、左壁部21Aに設けられるネジ孔(図示外)に対応する。挿通孔82に挿通されるネジ(図示外)は、左壁部21Aに設けられるネジ孔(図示外)に締め付けられている。
(4) Half mirror 80
The half mirror 80 is a plate-like member that is fixed to the front side portion of the left opening 21 in the left wall portion 21 </ b> A of the first housing 20. In other words, the first housing 20 fixes and supports the half mirror 80. The half mirror 80 may be formed of, for example, a transparent resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate, optical glass, or the like. The half mirror 80 includes a first plate-like portion 85 and a second plate-like portion 88. The first plate-like portion 85 has a substantially rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction when viewed from the left side. The second plate-like portion 88 extends obliquely left rearward from the rear end portion of the first plate-like portion 85. The first plate 85 is provided with a round hole 81, an insertion hole 82, and a long hole 83 in order from the top to the bottom. Each of the round hole 81 and the long hole 83 is inserted with a columnar protrusion (not shown) protruding leftward from the left wall 21A. The insertion hole 82 corresponds to a screw hole (not shown) provided in the left wall portion 21A. A screw (not shown) inserted through the insertion hole 82 is fastened to a screw hole (not shown) provided in the left wall portion 21A.
 図6に示すように、第2板状部88の後側の面88Aは、接眼光学系130によって導かれる画像光が照射される面である。面88Aには反射面89が形成される。反射面89は、接眼光学系130が導く画像光の少なくとも一部を、反射方向へ反射する領域である。反射面89は、例えば、面88Aの一部に所定の反射率(例えば50%)となるよう形成された、アルミニウム等の金属の薄膜層である。薄膜層の形成には、蒸着、スパッタリングなど、任意の薄膜形成プロセスが用いられてよい。なお、反射面には、アルミニウムに代えて、又は加えて、チタンなどの金属や、誘電体材料などを用いた多層膜が形成されてもよい。なお、金属を用いない誘電体材料のみによる多層膜が、反射面として用いられてもよい。なお、ハーフミラー80に代えて、接眼光学系130の画像光を全て反射可能な鏡面を有する反射部材が、第1筐体20に設けられてもよい。この反射部材は、例えば、アクリルやポリカーボネートなどの透明樹脂や、光学ガラスなどの基板の上に、反射率が略100%となるアルミニウムなどの金属材料の薄膜を、鏡面として形成することで得られる。この薄膜形成には、蒸着やスパッタリングなど、任意の薄膜加工プロセスが利用される。或いは、アルミニウムなどの金属材料自体を基材として、表面を鏡面研磨することで鏡面が形成されてもよい。 As shown in FIG. 6, the rear surface 88 </ b> A of the second plate-shaped portion 88 is a surface on which image light guided by the eyepiece optical system 130 is irradiated. A reflective surface 89 is formed on the surface 88A. The reflection surface 89 is a region that reflects at least a part of the image light guided by the eyepiece optical system 130 in the reflection direction. The reflection surface 89 is, for example, a thin film layer of metal such as aluminum formed on a part of the surface 88A so as to have a predetermined reflectance (for example, 50%). For the formation of the thin film layer, any thin film forming process such as vapor deposition or sputtering may be used. Note that a multilayer film using a metal such as titanium or a dielectric material may be formed on the reflective surface instead of or in addition to aluminum. A multilayer film made of only a dielectric material that does not use metal may be used as the reflecting surface. Instead of the half mirror 80, a reflective member having a mirror surface that can reflect all the image light of the eyepiece optical system 130 may be provided in the first housing 20. This reflecting member can be obtained, for example, by forming a thin film of a metal material such as aluminum having a reflectance of approximately 100% as a mirror surface on a transparent resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate, or a substrate such as optical glass. . For this thin film formation, an arbitrary thin film processing process such as vapor deposition or sputtering is used. Alternatively, the mirror surface may be formed by mirror-polishing the surface using a metal material itself such as aluminum as a base material.
(5)第2筐体30
 図7を参照し、第2筐体30の構成について説明する。第2筐体30は、第1筐体20に対して反射方向側に配置される。言い換えると、第1筐体20および第2筐体30の一方である第2筐体30は、他方である第1筐体20に対して反射方向側に配置される。第2筐体30は、前壁部31、上壁部32、および下壁部33を備える。前壁部31は、正面視で略矩形状の板状部材である。上壁部32は、前壁部31の上端部から前方に延びる。下壁部33は、前壁部31の下端部から前方に延びる。第2筐体30には、3つの挿通孔34、および一対の案内部35が設けられる。3つの挿通孔34は、夫々、前壁部31の左上角部、左下角部、および右上角部を前後方向に貫通する。3つの挿通孔34は、第1筐体20の後壁部(図示外)に設けられる3つのネジ孔(図示外)に対応する。ネジ34A(図6参照)が、挿通孔34に挿通され、第1筐体20の後壁部のネジ孔に締め付けられることで、第2筐体30と第1筐体20(図4参照)とは固定される。3つのネジ34Aは、筐体10のうち反射方向側に配置される(図6参照)。
(5) Second housing 30
The configuration of the second housing 30 will be described with reference to FIG. The second housing 30 is disposed on the reflection direction side with respect to the first housing 20. In other words, the second housing 30 that is one of the first housing 20 and the second housing 30 is disposed on the reflection direction side with respect to the first housing 20 that is the other. The second housing 30 includes a front wall portion 31, an upper wall portion 32, and a lower wall portion 33. The front wall portion 31 is a substantially rectangular plate-like member when viewed from the front. The upper wall portion 32 extends forward from the upper end portion of the front wall portion 31. The lower wall portion 33 extends forward from the lower end portion of the front wall portion 31. The second housing 30 is provided with three insertion holes 34 and a pair of guide portions 35. The three insertion holes 34 respectively penetrate the upper left corner, the lower left corner, and the upper right corner of the front wall portion 31 in the front-rear direction. The three insertion holes 34 correspond to three screw holes (not shown) provided in the rear wall portion (not shown) of the first housing 20. A screw 34A (see FIG. 6) is inserted through the insertion hole 34 and tightened into a screw hole in the rear wall portion of the first housing 20, whereby the second housing 30 and the first housing 20 (see FIG. 4). Is fixed. The three screws 34A are arranged on the reflection direction side of the housing 10 (see FIG. 6).
 一対の案内部35のうち一方は軸部38を備える。軸部38は、前壁部31の前面下側に設けられる。軸部38は、2つの軸取付部36および軸部材37を有する。2つの軸取付部36は、第1方向に並んで設けられる。夫々の軸取付部36は、上下方向に離間し、且つ互いに対向する一対の壁部によって形成される。軸部材37は、円柱状であり、第1方向に沿って延びる。軸部材37は、2つの取付部37Aおよび被摺動部37Bを有する。2つの取付部37Aは軸部材37の両端部に形成される。被摺動部37Bは、軸部材37のうち2つの取付部37Aの間に形成される。取付部37Aの直径は、被摺動部37Bの直径よりも小さく、夫々の軸取付部36を形成する一対の壁部の離間距離と略等しい。取付部37Aが前方から軸取付部36に嵌合することで、軸部材37は、軸取付部36に着脱可能に取り付けられる。 One of the pair of guide portions 35 includes a shaft portion 38. The shaft portion 38 is provided below the front surface of the front wall portion 31. The shaft portion 38 includes two shaft mounting portions 36 and a shaft member 37. The two shaft attachment portions 36 are provided side by side in the first direction. Each of the shaft attachment portions 36 is formed by a pair of wall portions that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and face each other. The shaft member 37 is cylindrical and extends along the first direction. The shaft member 37 has two attachment portions 37A and a sliding portion 37B. The two attachment portions 37 </ b> A are formed at both end portions of the shaft member 37. The sliding portion 37 </ b> B is formed between the two attachment portions 37 </ b> A of the shaft member 37. The diameter of the attachment portion 37A is smaller than the diameter of the slid portion 37B, and is substantially equal to the distance between the pair of wall portions that form the respective shaft attachment portions 36. The shaft member 37 is detachably attached to the shaft attachment portion 36 by fitting the attachment portion 37A to the shaft attachment portion 36 from the front.
 一対の案内部35のうち他方は突出部39を備える。突出部39は、上壁部32の下面から下方に突出する。言い換えると、突出部39は第1方向と交差する方向へ突出する。突出部39は、第1方向に沿って延び、且つ前後方向に厚さを有する板状部材である。突出部39と2つの軸取付部36とは、第1方向および第2方向と交差する上下方向に離間する。 The other of the pair of guide portions 35 includes a protruding portion 39. The protruding portion 39 protrudes downward from the lower surface of the upper wall portion 32. In other words, the protruding portion 39 protrudes in a direction that intersects the first direction. The protruding portion 39 is a plate-like member that extends along the first direction and has a thickness in the front-rear direction. The protrusion 39 and the two shaft attachment portions 36 are spaced apart in the vertical direction intersecting the first direction and the second direction.
(6)一対の摺動部146
 図5を参照し一対の摺動部146について説明する。なお、図5においては、筐体10(図1参照)の図示を省略している。一対の摺動部146は、例えば、夫々、レンズホルダ131の後側から、後向きに突出する突出部である。一対の摺動部146は、夫々、一対の案内部35(図7参照)に沿ってスライドすることで摺動可能である。一対の摺動部146の一方は、2つの軸挿通部141を備える。2つの軸挿通部141は、夫々、傾斜部133の左右略中央よりも前側および後側に設けられる。2つの軸挿通部141は、第1方向に離間して設けられる。夫々の軸挿通部141は、後方突出部143および穴部144を備える。後方突出部143は右側面視で略半円形の板状部材である。穴部144は、後方突出部143を第1方向に貫通する円形の開口部である。2つの軸挿通部141が夫々備える穴部144は、第1方向に離間している。穴部144の内径は、被摺動部37Bの直径よりも僅かに大きい。
(6) A pair of sliding portions 146
The pair of sliding portions 146 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, in FIG. 5, illustration of the housing | casing 10 (refer FIG. 1) is abbreviate | omitted. The pair of sliding portions 146 are projecting portions that project rearward from the rear side of the lens holder 131, for example. The pair of sliding portions 146 are slidable by sliding along the pair of guide portions 35 (see FIG. 7), respectively. One of the pair of sliding portions 146 includes two shaft insertion portions 141. The two shaft insertion portions 141 are provided on the front side and the rear side of the inclined portion 133 from the substantially left and right centers, respectively. The two shaft insertion portions 141 are provided apart from each other in the first direction. Each shaft insertion portion 141 includes a rear protrusion 143 and a hole 144. The rear protrusion 143 is a substantially semicircular plate-like member when viewed from the right side. The hole 144 is a circular opening that penetrates the rear protrusion 143 in the first direction. The hole portions 144 provided in the two shaft insertion portions 141 are separated from each other in the first direction. The inner diameter of the hole 144 is slightly larger than the diameter of the sliding part 37B.
 一対の摺動部146の他方は、上方立設部147を備える。上方立設部147は、傾斜部132の左右略中央に設けられる。上方立設部147は、2つの軸挿通部141と上下方向に離間している。上方立設部147は、第1方向において、2つの軸挿通部141の間となる位置に配置されている。上方立設部147は、前後方向に離間し、且つ互いに対向する一対の壁部によって形成される。上方立設部147は、第1方向に僅かに延びる。上方立設部147は溝部145を備える。溝部145は、上方立設部147の一対の壁部の間に形成される。溝部145の溝幅は、突出部39(図7参照)の厚さよりも僅かに大きい。 The other of the pair of sliding portions 146 includes an upper standing portion 147. The upper standing portion 147 is provided at the center of the inclined portion 132 on the left and right sides. The upper standing portion 147 is separated from the two shaft insertion portions 141 in the vertical direction. The upper standing portion 147 is disposed at a position between the two shaft insertion portions 141 in the first direction. The upper standing portion 147 is formed by a pair of wall portions that are separated in the front-rear direction and face each other. The upper standing portion 147 slightly extends in the first direction. The upper standing portion 147 includes a groove portion 145. The groove portion 145 is formed between the pair of wall portions of the upper standing portion 147. The groove width of the groove portion 145 is slightly larger than the thickness of the protruding portion 39 (see FIG. 7).
 第2筐体30に対する接眼光学系130の取付方法について説明する。取付部37A(図7参照)から取り外された軸部材37(図7参照)は、2つの穴部144に挿通される。突出部39(図7参照)が溝部145に嵌められた後、2つの取付部37Aは、夫々に対応する軸取付部36(図7参照)に取り付けられる。この結果、突出部39は溝部145に沿って摺動可能となり、2つの軸挿通部141は被摺動部37Bに沿って摺動可能となる。これにより、接眼光学系130は、第2筐体30によって第1方向に沿って往復移動可能に支持される。以下、接眼光学系130の可動範囲のうち、接眼光学系130が最も左側にある位置を左端位置(図8A参照)といい、最も右側にある位置を右端位置(図8B参照)という。 A method for attaching the eyepiece optical system 130 to the second housing 30 will be described. The shaft member 37 (see FIG. 7) removed from the attachment portion 37A (see FIG. 7) is inserted into the two holes 144. After the protrusion 39 (see FIG. 7) is fitted in the groove 145, the two attachment portions 37A are attached to the corresponding shaft attachment portions 36 (see FIG. 7). As a result, the projecting portion 39 can slide along the groove portion 145, and the two shaft insertion portions 141 can slide along the sliding portion 37B. Thereby, the eyepiece optical system 130 is supported by the second housing 30 so as to be reciprocally movable along the first direction. Hereinafter, of the movable range of the eyepiece optical system 130, the position where the eyepiece optical system 130 is on the leftmost side is referred to as a left end position (see FIG. 8A), and the position on the rightmost side is referred to as a right end position (see FIG. 8B).
 左端位置は、接眼光学系130がハーフミラー80(図6参照)に最も接近する位置である。従って、接眼光学系130によって導かれた光が照射される面88A(図6参照)上の領域は、接眼光学系130が左端位置にある場合に最も大きくなる。以下、この領域を最大照射領域84(図6参照)という。図6に示すように、最大照射領域84は、反射面89の内側にある。つまり、反射面89は最大照射領域84を含んでいる。 The left end position is a position where the eyepiece optical system 130 is closest to the half mirror 80 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, the area on the surface 88A (see FIG. 6) to which the light guided by the eyepiece optical system 130 is irradiated becomes the largest when the eyepiece optical system 130 is at the left end position. Hereinafter, this region is referred to as a maximum irradiation region 84 (see FIG. 6). As shown in FIG. 6, the maximum irradiation region 84 is inside the reflection surface 89. That is, the reflective surface 89 includes the maximum irradiation region 84.
(7)アジャスタ70
 図4および図5を参照し、アジャスタ70について説明する。アジャスタ70は、正面視で円形状の部材である。アジャスタ70は、前後方向に延びる軸線X(図5参照)を中心に回動可能に構成される。後述するように、アジャスタ70が回動することで、接眼光学系130は往復移動し、HMD1のピント調整がなされる。
(7) Adjuster 70
The adjuster 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. The adjuster 70 is a circular member in front view. The adjuster 70 is configured to be rotatable about an axis X (see FIG. 5) extending in the front-rear direction. As will be described later, when the adjuster 70 rotates, the eyepiece optical system 130 reciprocates, and the focus adjustment of the HMD 1 is performed.
 アジャスタ70は、第1回動部材71および第2回動部材72を備える。第1回動部材71は、使用者がアジャスタ70を回動させる場合に、使用される部材である。第1回動部材71は、前面視で略円形の蓋状である。第1回動部材71は、前壁部73および周壁部74を備える。前壁部73は、正面視で略円形の板状部材である。周壁部74は、前壁部の周縁部から後方へ延びる。周壁部74は、前壁部20Aから前方へ向かって突出する円筒状の取付部(図示外)の外周面に、回動可能に取り付けられる。周壁部74の外周面には、周壁部74の周方向に亘って、凹凸部74Aが設けられる。凹凸部74Aは、使用者が指(図示外)で周壁部74の外周面をつまんで第1回動部材71を回動させる場合に、指が周壁部74に対して滑ることを防止する。 The adjuster 70 includes a first rotating member 71 and a second rotating member 72. The first rotation member 71 is a member used when the user rotates the adjuster 70. The first rotating member 71 has a substantially circular lid shape when viewed from the front. The first rotating member 71 includes a front wall portion 73 and a peripheral wall portion 74. The front wall portion 73 is a substantially circular plate-like member when viewed from the front. The peripheral wall portion 74 extends rearward from the peripheral edge portion of the front wall portion. The peripheral wall portion 74 is rotatably attached to the outer peripheral surface of a cylindrical attachment portion (not shown) protruding forward from the front wall portion 20A. On the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 74, an uneven portion 74 </ b> A is provided across the circumferential direction of the peripheral wall portion 74. The uneven portion 74 </ b> A prevents the finger from sliding relative to the peripheral wall portion 74 when the user pinches the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 74 with a finger (not shown) and rotates the first rotating member 71.
 第2回動部材72は、前面視で略円形の板状部材である。第2回動部材72は、前壁部20Aを挟んで、第1回動部材71の後方に位置する。つまり、第2回動部材72は、第1筐体20の内側に位置する。第2回動部材72は、第1回動部材71と同軸上に配置される。第2回動部材72の中央部には、ネジ部材75が設けられる。ネジ部材75は、取付部の内側で第1筐体20の前壁部20Aを貫通する貫通孔(図示外)を通過して、第1回動部材71の中心部に締め付けられる。これにより、第1回動部材71と第2回動部材72は、一体となって回動する。第2回動部材72の外周面には、周方向に亘って凹凸部72Aが設けられている。凹凸部72Aのうち何れか一つは、筐体10の内部に設けられる板バネ(図示外)と係止している。 The second rotating member 72 is a substantially circular plate-like member when viewed from the front. The second rotating member 72 is located behind the first rotating member 71 with the front wall portion 20A interposed therebetween. That is, the second rotating member 72 is located inside the first housing 20. The second rotating member 72 is arranged coaxially with the first rotating member 71. A screw member 75 is provided at the center of the second rotating member 72. The screw member 75 passes through a through hole (not shown) passing through the front wall portion 20 </ b> A of the first housing 20 inside the attachment portion, and is tightened to the center portion of the first rotating member 71. Thereby, the 1st rotation member 71 and the 2nd rotation member 72 rotate integrally. On the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating member 72, an uneven portion 72A is provided in the circumferential direction. Any one of the concavo-convex portions 72 </ b> A is engaged with a leaf spring (not shown) provided inside the housing 10.
 第2回動部材72の後側面には、カム溝76が設けられる。カム溝76は、第2回動部材72の後側面の一部が前方へ向かって凹むことで形成される溝部である。カム溝76は、アジャスタ70の軸線Xを中心に渦巻き状に延びる。カム溝76は、背面視で、時計回り方向に向かうにつれて、アジャスタ70の軸線Xから離間するように延びる(図9A参照)。カム溝76は、開始端76Aと終端76Bを備える。開始端76Aは、カム溝76のうち背面視で時計回り方向側の端部であり、終端76Bは反時計回り方向側の端部である。カム溝76の延設方向の一端である開始端76Aは、延設方向の他端である終端76Bよりも、アジャスタ70の軸線Xから離間している。 A cam groove 76 is provided on the rear side surface of the second rotating member 72. The cam groove 76 is a groove formed by a part of the rear side surface of the second rotating member 72 being recessed forward. The cam groove 76 extends in a spiral shape around the axis X of the adjuster 70. The cam groove 76 extends away from the axis X of the adjuster 70 in the clockwise direction in the rear view (see FIG. 9A). The cam groove 76 includes a start end 76A and a terminal end 76B. The start end 76A is an end portion on the clockwise side of the cam groove 76 in the rear view, and the end end 76B is an end portion on the counterclockwise direction side. A start end 76A that is one end in the extending direction of the cam groove 76 is farther from the axis X of the adjuster 70 than a terminal end 76B that is the other end in the extending direction.
 本実施形態におけるカム溝76は、角度範囲が約170度となるように第2回動部材72の後側面に形成されている。より詳細には、開始端76Aおよび軸線Xを含む平面78(図9A参照)と、終端76Bおよび軸線Xを含む平面79(図9A参照)とのなす角度のうち、カム溝76側の角度(以下、第1角度という)は、約170度である(図9A参照)。つまり、第1角度は、90度以上、且つ180度以下である。もちろん、第1角度は、90度未満であってもよいし、180度よりも大きくてもよい。 The cam groove 76 in the present embodiment is formed on the rear side surface of the second rotating member 72 so that the angle range is about 170 degrees. More specifically, among the angles formed by the plane 78 (see FIG. 9A) including the start end 76A and the axis X and the plane 79 (see FIG. 9A) including the end 76B and the axis X (see FIG. 9A), Hereinafter, the first angle is about 170 degrees (see FIG. 9A). That is, the first angle is not less than 90 degrees and not more than 180 degrees. Of course, the first angle may be less than 90 degrees or greater than 180 degrees.
 カム溝76の内側には突出部136(図4参照)が後方から挿入される。言い換えると、突出部136は反射方向側からカム溝76に挿入される。第2回動部材72が回動する場合、突出部136はカム溝76の内側壁面によって第1方向に往復移動され、接眼光学系130は第1方向に往復移動できる。突出部136が開始端76Aに当接する場合、接眼光学系130は左端位置に位置し、突出部136が終端76Bに当接する場合、接眼光学系130は右端位置に位置する。 A protrusion 136 (see FIG. 4) is inserted into the cam groove 76 from behind. In other words, the protrusion 136 is inserted into the cam groove 76 from the reflection direction side. When the second rotating member 72 rotates, the protrusion 136 is reciprocated in the first direction by the inner wall surface of the cam groove 76, and the eyepiece optical system 130 can reciprocate in the first direction. When the protrusion 136 is in contact with the start end 76A, the eyepiece optical system 130 is located at the left end position, and when the protrusion 136 is in contact with the terminal end 76B, the eyepiece optical system 130 is located at the right end position.
(8)ピント調整
 次に、図8A、図8B、図9A、図9Bを参照し、ピント調整の方法について説明する。なお、以下の説明では、ピント調整前の接眼光学系130は左端位置に位置するものとする。また、図8A、図8Bでは、ハーフミラー80、第1筐体20、および第3筐体40の図示を省略している。図8Aおよび図9Aに示すように、使用者は、凹凸部74Aを指(図示外)でつまんで、正面視で反時計回り方向(図8Aの矢印A方向、図9Aの矢印C方向)に回動させる。あるいは、使用者は、筐体10を上下方向から指(例えば、親指と人差し指)で挟み、指(例えば、中指)を伸縮することで第1回動部材71を回動させてもよい。この場合、第2回動部材72の回動に伴って、カム溝76も回動する。カム溝76の外側壁面は、回動に伴い、当接する凸部136を右方(図8Aの矢印B方向、図9Aの矢印D方向)へ移動させる。凸部136の移動に伴い、上方立設部147は(図5参照)は突出部39(図7参照)に沿って摺動しながら右方へと移動し、2つの軸挿通部141(図5参照)は、被摺動部37B(図7参照)に沿って摺動しながら右方へと移動する。つまり、一対の摺動部146(図5参照)は、一対の案内部35(図7参照)の夫々に沿って摺動する。これにより、接眼光学系130は、左端位置から右方へと移動する。この場合、上方立設部147の溝部145(図5参照)は、接眼光学系130が、2つの穴部144の軸線回りに回転すること阻止する。
(8) Focus Adjustment Next, a focus adjustment method will be described with reference to FIGS. 8A, 8B, 9A, and 9B. In the following description, it is assumed that the eyepiece optical system 130 before focus adjustment is located at the left end position. 8A and 8B, illustration of the half mirror 80, the first housing 20, and the third housing 40 is omitted. As shown in FIGS. 8A and 9A, the user pinches the concavo-convex portion 74A with a finger (not shown) and turns it counterclockwise (in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 8A and in the direction of arrow C in FIG. 9A) in front view. Rotate. Alternatively, the user may rotate the first rotating member 71 by sandwiching the casing 10 from above and below with fingers (for example, thumb and index finger) and expanding and contracting the fingers (for example, middle finger). In this case, the cam groove 76 also rotates as the second rotating member 72 rotates. The outer wall surface of the cam groove 76 moves the abutting convex portion 136 to the right (the direction of arrow B in FIG. 8A and the direction of arrow D in FIG. 9A) as it rotates. As the convex portion 136 moves, the upper standing portion 147 (see FIG. 5) moves to the right while sliding along the protruding portion 39 (see FIG. 7), and the two shaft insertion portions 141 (see FIG. 5) are moved. 5) moves to the right while sliding along the sliding part 37B (see FIG. 7). That is, the pair of sliding portions 146 (see FIG. 5) slides along each of the pair of guide portions 35 (see FIG. 7). As a result, the eyepiece optical system 130 moves from the left end position to the right. In this case, the groove portion 145 (see FIG. 5) of the upper standing portion 147 prevents the eyepiece optical system 130 from rotating about the axis of the two hole portions 144.
 図8B、図9Bに示すように、第2回動部材72が正面視で反時計回り方向に約170度回動すると、終端76Bが突出部136と当接する。この場合、接眼光学系130は、右端位置まで移動する。接眼光学系130が、左端位置から右端位置へと移動する場合であっても、使用者は、アジャスタ70を約170度回動させればよい。従って、使用者は、指でつまんだアジャスタ70を持ち変える必要がない。仮に、カム溝76の形成される角度範囲が180度よりも大きい(第1角度が180度よりも大きい)場合、接眼光学系130を左端位置から右端位置へと移動させるとき、使用者は、アジャスタ70を軸線Xを中心に180度よりも大きく回動させる必要がある。従って、使用者は、指でつまんだアジャスタ70を持ち変える必要が生じる。これは、人間の手の構造上、指でつまんだ物を、該物を持ち変えることなく180度以上回転させることが困難なことに起因する。 8B and 9B, when the second rotating member 72 rotates about 170 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the terminal end 76B comes into contact with the protrusion 136. In this case, the eyepiece optical system 130 moves to the right end position. Even when the eyepiece optical system 130 moves from the left end position to the right end position, the user may rotate the adjuster 70 about 170 degrees. Therefore, the user does not need to change the adjuster 70 pinched with fingers. If the angle range in which the cam groove 76 is formed is larger than 180 degrees (the first angle is larger than 180 degrees), when moving the eyepiece optical system 130 from the left end position to the right end position, the user The adjuster 70 needs to be rotated more than 180 degrees around the axis X. Therefore, the user needs to change the adjuster 70 pinched with fingers. This is because it is difficult to rotate an object pinched with a finger 180 degrees or more without changing the object due to the structure of a human hand.
 このように、アジャスタ70が回動することで、接眼光学系130は、一対の案内部35に沿って、ハーフミラー80および液晶ユニット120に対して、第1方向に沿って相対移動する。アジャスタ70の回動量に応じて、接眼光学系130の移動量が調整できるので、HMD1はピント調整を行うことができる。なお、第2回動部材72が回動する場合に、筐体10内部に設けられる板バネ(図示外)が係止する凹凸部72Aは、順次切り替わる。従って、HMD1は、アジャスタ70が回動していることを使用者に確実に感知させることができる。 Thus, when the adjuster 70 rotates, the eyepiece optical system 130 moves relative to the half mirror 80 and the liquid crystal unit 120 along the pair of guide portions 35 along the first direction. Since the amount of movement of the eyepiece optical system 130 can be adjusted according to the amount of rotation of the adjuster 70, the HMD 1 can perform focus adjustment. In addition, when the 2nd rotation member 72 rotates, the uneven | corrugated | grooved part 72A which the leaf | plate spring (not shown) provided in the housing | casing 10 latches switches sequentially. Therefore, the HMD 1 can reliably make the user sense that the adjuster 70 is rotating.
 また、第1回動部材71は第1筐体20の前壁部20Aの前面に設けられる。これにより、中央フレーム部94(図1参照)の上面右端側に設けられるHMD1が、上下左右を反転させられた状態で、中央フレーム部94の上面左端側に設けられる場合であっても、第1回動部材71は、第1筐体20の前側に位置したままとなる。従って、HMD1が設けられる位置が中央フレーム部94の左右どちらの側であっても、ピント調整を行う使用者は、迷うことなく第1回動部材71に触ることができる。よって、HMD1は、ピント調整の操作性を向上できる。 The first rotating member 71 is provided on the front surface of the front wall portion 20A of the first housing 20. As a result, even if the HMD 1 provided on the upper right end side of the central frame portion 94 (see FIG. 1) is provided on the upper left end side of the central frame portion 94 in the state where the upper and lower sides and the left and right sides are reversed, The 1 rotation member 71 remains positioned on the front side of the first housing 20. Therefore, the user who performs the focus adjustment can touch the first rotating member 71 without hesitation, regardless of whether the position where the HMD 1 is provided is on the left or right side of the central frame portion 94. Therefore, the HMD 1 can improve the focus adjustment operability.
 以上、説明したように、使用者がピント調整を行う場合、アジャスタ70を回動させれば、接眼光学系130は、ハーフミラー80および液晶ユニット120に対して第1方向に相対移動する。この場合、液晶表示装置126は、第2筐体30に固定されたままである。従って、ピント調整に伴い液晶表示装置126が第1方向に往復移動して、FPC等から移動を妨げる荷重を受けることはない。よって、画像光を生成する液晶表示装置126は、第1方向に対して傾斜しにくい。従って、HMD1は、ピント調整を行う場合であっても、使用者に視認させる画像を変形しにくくできる。 As described above, when the user performs focus adjustment, if the adjuster 70 is rotated, the eyepiece optical system 130 moves relative to the half mirror 80 and the liquid crystal unit 120 in the first direction. In this case, the liquid crystal display device 126 remains fixed to the second housing 30. Therefore, the liquid crystal display device 126 does not reciprocate in the first direction in accordance with the focus adjustment and receives a load that hinders the movement from the FPC or the like. Therefore, the liquid crystal display device 126 that generates image light is not easily inclined with respect to the first direction. Accordingly, the HMD 1 can make it difficult to deform an image that is visually recognized by the user even when focus adjustment is performed.
 また、接眼光学系130は、一対の摺動部146が一対の案内部35に沿って摺動することで、第1方向に移動する。一対の案内部35が接眼光学系130を第1方向に沿って案内するので、接眼光学系130は往復移動し易く、第1方向に対して傾きにくい。よって、HMD1は、ピント調整を行う場合に、使用者に視認させる画像をさらに変形しにくくできる。 Further, the eyepiece optical system 130 moves in the first direction as the pair of sliding portions 146 slide along the pair of guide portions 35. Since the pair of guide portions 35 guide the eyepiece optical system 130 along the first direction, the eyepiece optical system 130 is easy to reciprocate and is not easily tilted with respect to the first direction. Therefore, the HMD 1 can further make it difficult to deform an image to be visually recognized by the user when performing focus adjustment.
 また、第1筐体20と第2筐体30とを固定するネジ34Aは、筐体10のうち、反射方向側の部分に配置される。ネジ34Aは、HMD1の使用時において、使用者以外の視点からは視認されにくい。よって、HMD1は、外観の見栄えを良好にできる。なお、第1筐体20と第2筐体30とを固定する構成は、ネジ34Aに限定されない。例えば、ネジ34Aの代わりに、第1筐体20の後壁部に前方へ凹む溝が設けられ、第2筐体30の前壁部31の前面に爪を設けてもよい。第2筐体30に設けられる爪が、第1筐体20の溝に係合することで、第1筐体20と第2筐体30を固定してもよい。 Further, the screw 34A for fixing the first housing 20 and the second housing 30 is disposed in a portion of the housing 10 on the reflection direction side. The screw 34 </ b> A is difficult to be seen from a viewpoint other than the user when the HMD 1 is used. Therefore, the HMD 1 can improve the appearance of the appearance. In addition, the structure which fixes the 1st housing | casing 20 and the 2nd housing | casing 30 is not limited to the screw 34A. For example, instead of the screw 34 </ b> A, a groove recessed forward may be provided in the rear wall portion of the first housing 20, and a claw may be provided on the front surface of the front wall portion 31 of the second housing 30. The first housing 20 and the second housing 30 may be fixed by engaging a claw provided in the second housing 30 with the groove of the first housing 20.
 また、穴部144に軸部材37が挿入され、溝部145に突出部39が嵌められ、軸部材37が軸取付部36に取り付けられるだけで、接眼光学系130は、第1方向に沿って往復移動可能となる。よって、HMD1は、組立性を向上できる。 Moreover, the eyepiece optical system 130 is reciprocated along the first direction only by inserting the shaft member 37 into the hole 144, fitting the protrusion 39 into the groove 145, and attaching the shaft member 37 to the shaft attachment portion 36. It becomes possible to move. Therefore, the HMD 1 can improve assemblability.
 上方立設部147は、第1方向において、2つの軸挿通部141の間となる位置に配置されている。上方立設部147は、2つの穴部の軸線回りに接眼光学系130が回転するのを安定して阻止できる。よって、HMD1は、接眼光学系130の往復移動をさらに安定化できる。 The upper standing portion 147 is disposed at a position between the two shaft insertion portions 141 in the first direction. The upper standing portion 147 can stably prevent the eyepiece optical system 130 from rotating about the axis of the two holes. Therefore, the HMD 1 can further stabilize the reciprocating movement of the eyepiece optical system 130.
 また、アジャスタ70が回動する場合、カム溝76が突出部136を第1方向に沿って往復移動させることで、接眼光学系130は往復移動できる。使用者は、アジャスタ70を回動させるだけで、接眼光学系130を往復移動させることができる。よってHMD1は、ピント調整を行う場合の操作性を向上できる。 Further, when the adjuster 70 rotates, the eye groove optical system 130 can reciprocate because the cam groove 76 reciprocates the protrusion 136 along the first direction. The user can reciprocate the eyepiece optical system 130 simply by rotating the adjuster 70. Therefore, the HMD 1 can improve operability when performing focus adjustment.
 また、第1角度(約170度)は、90度以上、且つ180度以下である。カム溝76の形成される角度範囲が90度よりも小さい(第1角度が90度よりも小さい)場合、接眼光学系130が本実施形態と同じ移動量だけ往復移動するためには、アジャスタ70の単位回動量当たりに接眼光学系130が第1方向に沿って移動する移動量が増大する。カム溝76の形成される角度範囲が90度以上であることで、アジャスタ70の単位回動量当たりに接眼光学系130が第1方向に沿って移動する移動量は、抑制される。また、第1角度が180度以下であることで、使用者はピント調整を行う場合に、指でつまんだアジャスタ70を持ち変える必要がない。従って、第1角度が90度以上、且つ180度以下であることで、使用者は、指でつまんだアジャスタ70を持ち変えることなく、接眼光学系130の微調整ができる。よって、HMD1は、ピント調整の操作性をさらに向上できる。 Further, the first angle (about 170 degrees) is 90 degrees or more and 180 degrees or less. When the angle range in which the cam groove 76 is formed is smaller than 90 degrees (the first angle is smaller than 90 degrees), the adjuster 70 is used for the eyepiece optical system 130 to reciprocate by the same amount of movement as in the present embodiment. The amount of movement of the eyepiece optical system 130 along the first direction per unit rotation amount increases. Since the angle range in which the cam groove 76 is formed is 90 degrees or more, the amount of movement of the eyepiece optical system 130 along the first direction per unit rotation amount of the adjuster 70 is suppressed. In addition, since the first angle is 180 degrees or less, the user does not have to change the adjuster 70 pinched with a finger when performing the focus adjustment. Therefore, when the first angle is 90 degrees or more and 180 degrees or less, the user can finely adjust the eyepiece optical system 130 without changing the adjuster 70 pinched with a finger. Accordingly, the HMD 1 can further improve the focus adjustment operability.
 また、反射面89は最大照射領域84を含む。従って、往復移動する位置に関わらず、接眼光学系130が面88Aへ照射する画像光は、反射面89から外れることはない。従って、HMD1は、接眼光学系130の位置に関わらず、安定して画像光の画像を使用者に視認させることができる。 Further, the reflection surface 89 includes the maximum irradiation region 84. Accordingly, the image light that the eyepiece optical system 130 irradiates to the surface 88 </ b> A does not deviate from the reflecting surface 89 regardless of the reciprocating position. Therefore, the HMD 1 can make the user visually recognize the image light image stably regardless of the position of the eyepiece optical system 130.
 また、HMD1が使用者に装着された状態で、突出部136、一対の摺動部146、一対の案内部35、及び、カム溝76は、使用者に対して前後方向に配置され、上下方向に配置されない。このため、HMD1は、使用者に装着された状態で上下方向の大きさを抑制できる。従って、使用者の視野が筐体10によって遮られる可能性は低減される。従って、HMD1は、使用者に装着された状態で使用者の視野を良好に維持できる。 Further, in a state in which the HMD 1 is mounted on the user, the projecting portion 136, the pair of sliding portions 146, the pair of guide portions 35, and the cam groove 76 are arranged in the front-rear direction with respect to the user, and the vertical direction Not placed in. For this reason, HMD1 can suppress the magnitude | size of an up-down direction in the state with which the user was mounted | worn. Therefore, the possibility that the user's field of view is blocked by the housing 10 is reduced. Therefore, HMD1 can maintain a user's visual field favorably in the state with which the user was equipped.
<第2実施形態>
 次に、本開示の他の実施形態について、図面を参照して説明する。図10に示すように、HMD101は、光学透過型のシースルーHMDである。使用者の眼前の景色の光は、ハーフミラー56を透過することによって使用者の眼に直接導かれる。HMD101の投影形式は、虚像投影型である。ハーフミラー56は、液晶パネル72B(図15参照、後述)に表示された画像の光を、使用者の片側の眼に向けて反射させる。HMD101は、使用者に対して、眼前の景色に画像を重ねて認識させることができる。HMD101は、本体部材11、装着具8、及び、接続具9を備える。以下、図の説明の理解を助けるため、HMD101の上側、下側、左側、右側、前側、及び、後側を定義する。HMD101の上側、下側、左側、右側、前側、及び、後側は、例えば、図10の上側、下側、左側、右側、左斜め下側、及び、右斜め上側にそれぞれ対応する。HMD101の上側、下側、左側、右側、前側、及び、後側は、それぞれ、装着具8が使用者に着用された場合の方向に対応する。
Second Embodiment
Next, another embodiment of the present disclosure will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 10, the HMD 101 is an optically transmissive see-through HMD. The light in the scene in front of the user's eyes is guided directly to the user's eyes by passing through the half mirror 56. The projection format of the HMD 101 is a virtual image projection type. The half mirror 56 reflects the light of the image displayed on the liquid crystal panel 72B (see FIG. 15, described later) toward the eye on one side of the user. The HMD 101 can allow the user to recognize an image superimposed on the scene in front of him. The HMD 101 includes a main body member 11, a mounting tool 8, and a connection tool 9. Hereinafter, in order to help understand the description of the figure, the upper side, lower side, left side, right side, front side, and rear side of the HMD 101 are defined. The upper side, the lower side, the left side, the right side, the front side, and the rear side of the HMD 101 correspond to, for example, the upper side, the lower side, the left side, the right side, the lower left diagonal side, and the upper right diagonal side of FIG. The upper side, lower side, left side, right side, front side, and rear side of the HMD 101 correspond to directions when the wearing tool 8 is worn by the user.
<装着具8、接続具9、本体部材11>
 装着具8は、樹脂や金属(例えば、ステンレス)などの、可撓性を有する材質で構成される。装着具8は、第1部分8A及び第2部分8B、8Cを有する。第1部分8A及び第2部分8B、8Cは、それぞれ、湾曲した細長い板状部材である。第1部分8Aは、左右方向に延び、且つ、前側に凸状に湾曲する。第2部分8Bは、第1部分8Aの一方側(例えば、左側)の端部から延びる。第2部分8Cは、第1部分8Aの他方側(例えば、右側)の端部から延びる。第2部分8B、8Cは、それぞれ、第1部分8Aと接続する側と反対側(例えば、後側)の端部が互いに近づく方向に延びる。装着具8は、使用者の前頭部、右側頭部、及び、左側頭部のそれぞれに、第1部分8A、第2部分8B、8Cを接触させた状態で、使用者の頭部に着用される。この状態で、第1部分8Aは使用者の額に沿って左右方向に延びる。
<Mounting tool 8, connecting tool 9, body member 11>
The mounting tool 8 is made of a flexible material such as resin or metal (for example, stainless steel). The mounting tool 8 includes a first portion 8A and second portions 8B and 8C. The first portion 8A and the second portions 8B and 8C are each a curved elongated plate-like member. The first portion 8A extends in the left-right direction and is curved in a convex shape on the front side. The second portion 8B extends from an end portion on one side (for example, the left side) of the first portion 8A. The second portion 8C extends from the end portion on the other side (for example, the right side) of the first portion 8A. The second portions 8B and 8C each extend in a direction in which end portions on the opposite side (for example, rear side) to the side connected to the first portion 8A approach each other. The wearing tool 8 is worn on the user's head with the first part 8A, the second part 8B, and 8C in contact with the frontal, right and left heads of the user, respectively. Is done. In this state, the first portion 8A extends in the left-right direction along the forehead of the user.
 接続具9は棒状である。接続具9は、樹脂や金属などで構成される。接続具9の一端側(例えば、上側)は、装着具8の第1部分8Aのうち第2部分8Cと接続する部分の近傍に接続される。接続具9と装着具8とは、ボールジョイントで接続される。接続具9の他端側(例えば、下側)に、後述する本体部材11が接続される。接続具9と本体部材11とは、ボールジョイントで接続される。接続具9は、装着具8から離隔した位置に本体部材11を保持する。接続具9は、装着具8が使用者の頭部に着用された状態で、本体部材11のハーフミラー56を、使用者の左眼の前方に配置させることができる。 接 続 Connector 9 is rod-shaped. The connection tool 9 is made of resin or metal. One end side (for example, the upper side) of the connection tool 9 is connected to the vicinity of a portion of the first portion 8A of the mounting tool 8 that is connected to the second portion 8C. The connection tool 9 and the mounting tool 8 are connected by a ball joint. A body member 11 to be described later is connected to the other end side (for example, the lower side) of the connection tool 9. The connection tool 9 and the main body member 11 are connected by a ball joint. The connection tool 9 holds the main body member 11 at a position separated from the mounting tool 8. The connection tool 9 can arrange | position the half mirror 56 of the main body member 11 ahead of a user's left eye in the state in which the mounting tool 8 was worn by the user's head.
 図10、図11、図12に示すように、本体部材11は、筐体12、操作部材3、調節機構4(図6参照)、偏向ユニット59、レンズユニット6(図15参照)、画像ユニット7(図6参照)を備えている。偏向ユニット59は、ホルダ5及びハーフミラー56を有する。 As shown in FIGS. 10, 11, and 12, the main body member 11 includes a housing 12, an operation member 3, an adjustment mechanism 4 (see FIG. 6), a deflection unit 59, a lens unit 6 (see FIG. 15), and an image unit. 7 (see FIG. 6). The deflection unit 59 has a holder 5 and a half mirror 56.
<筐体12>
 図10、図11、図13に示すように、筐体12は、本体部12Aと突出部12Bとを有する。筐体12は、支持部材の一例である。本体部12Aは、角が湾曲した略直方体状の形状を有する。突出部12Bは、本体部12Aの右後側から後方に突出する。筐体12は中空箱状である。本体部12Aの前側、上側、下側、後側、及び、右側を、それぞれ、第1筐体1021、第2筐体1022、第3筐体1023(図10参照)、第4筐体24(図13参照)、及び、第5筐体25(図10参照)という。第1筐体1021の前側の面、第2筐体1022の上側の面、第3筐体1023の下側の面、第4筐体24の後側の面、及び、第5筐体25の右側の面を、それぞれ、第1表面21M、第2表面22M、第3表面23M、第4表面24M(図13参照)、及び、第5表面25M(図10参照)という。なお、筐体12の左側は開放し、筐体12内部のレンズユニット6(後述)の左側は露出する。レンズユニット6の左側は、筐体12によって覆われない。
<Case 12>
As shown in FIGS. 10, 11, and 13, the housing 12 includes a main body portion 12 </ b> A and a protruding portion 12 </ b> B. The housing 12 is an example of a support member. The main body 12A has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape with curved corners. The protrusion 12B protrudes rearward from the right rear side of the main body 12A. The housing 12 has a hollow box shape. The front side, the upper side, the lower side, the rear side, and the right side of the main body 12A are respectively a first casing 1021, a second casing 1022, a third casing 1023 (see FIG. 10), and a fourth casing 24 ( 13) and the fifth casing 25 (see FIG. 10). The front surface of the first housing 1021, the upper surface of the second housing 1022, the lower surface of the third housing 1023, the rear surface of the fourth housing 24, and the fifth housing 25 The right surfaces are referred to as a first surface 21M, a second surface 22M, a third surface 23M, a fourth surface 24M (see FIG. 13), and a fifth surface 25M (see FIG. 10), respectively. The left side of the housing 12 is opened, and the left side of a lens unit 6 (described later) inside the housing 12 is exposed. The left side of the lens unit 6 is not covered by the housing 12.
 図10、図11に示すように、第1表面21Mと第2表面22Mとが接続する部分の近傍(以下、湾曲部分212という。)、第1表面21Mと第3表面23Mとが接続する部分の近傍(以下、湾曲部分213という。)は、それぞれ湾曲する。図10に示すように、第1表面21Mと第5表面25Mとが接続する部分の近傍(以下、湾曲部分215という。)、第2表面22Mと第5表面25Mとが接続する部分の近傍(以下、湾曲部分225という。)、及び、第3表面23Mと第5表面25Mとが接続する部分の近傍(以下、湾曲部分235という。)は、それぞれ湾曲する。 As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, in the vicinity of the portion where the first surface 21M and the second surface 22M are connected (hereinafter referred to as the curved portion 212), the portion where the first surface 21M and the third surface 23M are connected. (Hereinafter, referred to as a curved portion 213) is curved. As shown in FIG. 10, in the vicinity of a portion where the first surface 21M and the fifth surface 25M are connected (hereinafter referred to as a curved portion 215), in the vicinity of a portion where the second surface 22M and the fifth surface 25M are connected ( Hereinafter, the curved portion 225) and the vicinity of the portion where the third surface 23M and the fifth surface 25M are connected (hereinafter referred to as the curved portion 235) are curved.
 なお以下では、湾曲部分212のうち、接線が水平方向に対して45度傾斜する位置を、接続位置212S(図12参照)と定義する。接続位置212Sは、第1表面21M及び第2表面22Mが接続する位置である。接続位置212Sは、又、第1筐体1021及び第2筐体1022が接続する位置でもある。湾曲部分213のうち、接線が水平方向に対して45度傾斜する位置を、接続位置213S(図12参照)と定義する。接続位置213Sは、第1表面21M及び第3表面23Mが接続する位置である。接続位置213Sは、又、第1筐体1021及び第3筐体1023が接続する位置でもある。湾曲部分215のうち、接線が水平方向に対して45度傾斜する位置を、接続位置215Sと定義する。接続位置215Sは、第1表面21M及び第5表面25Mが接続する位置である。接続位置215Sは、又、第1筐体1021及び第5筐体25が接続する位置でもある。湾曲部分225のうち、接線が水平方向に対して45度傾斜する位置を、接続位置225Sと定義する。接続位置225Sは、第2表面22M及び第5表面25Mが接続する位置である。接続位置225Sは、又、第2筐体1022及び第5筐体25の接続する位置でもある。湾曲部分235のうち、接線が水平方向に対して45度傾斜する位置を、接続位置235Sと定義する。接続位置235Sは、第3表面23M及び第5表面25Mが接続する位置である。接続位置235Sは、又、第3筐体1023及び第5筐体25が接続する位置でもある。 In the following, a position where the tangent is inclined 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction in the curved portion 212 is defined as a connection position 212S (see FIG. 12). The connection position 212S is a position where the first surface 21M and the second surface 22M are connected. The connection position 212S is also a position where the first housing 1021 and the second housing 1022 are connected. A position where the tangent is inclined 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction in the curved portion 213 is defined as a connection position 213S (see FIG. 12). The connection position 213S is a position where the first surface 21M and the third surface 23M are connected. The connection position 213S is also a position where the first housing 1021 and the third housing 1023 are connected. A position where the tangent is inclined 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction in the curved portion 215 is defined as a connection position 215S. The connection position 215S is a position where the first surface 21M and the fifth surface 25M are connected. The connection position 215S is also a position where the first housing 1021 and the fifth housing 25 are connected. A position where the tangent is inclined 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction in the curved portion 225 is defined as a connection position 225S. The connection position 225S is a position where the second surface 22M and the fifth surface 25M are connected. The connection position 225S is also a position where the second housing 1022 and the fifth housing 25 are connected. A position where the tangent is inclined 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction in the curved portion 235 is defined as a connection position 235S. The connection position 235S is a position where the third surface 23M and the fifth surface 25M are connected. The connection position 235S is also a position where the third housing 1023 and the fifth housing 25 are connected.
 第2表面22Mは、後側から前側に向かうに従って斜め下方向に傾斜する。第3表面23Mは、後側から前側に向かうに従って斜め上方向に傾斜する。このため、第2表面22Mと第3表面23Mとの間の上下方向の距離は、後側から前側に向かうに従って徐々に小さくなる。従って、第5表面25Mの上下方向の長さ、言い換えると、接続位置225Sと接続位置235Sとの間の上下方向の長さも、後側から前側に向かうに従って徐々に小さくなる。 The second surface 22M is inclined obliquely downward as it goes from the rear side to the front side. The third surface 23M is inclined obliquely upward as it goes from the rear side to the front side. For this reason, the vertical distance between the second surface 22M and the third surface 23M gradually decreases from the rear side toward the front side. Therefore, the length in the vertical direction of the fifth surface 25M, in other words, the length in the vertical direction between the connection position 225S and the connection position 235S gradually decreases from the rear side toward the front side.
 図11に示すように、第1筐体1021の左端21Cは、上下方向両端部から上下方向中心に向けて、右方に凹む。左端21Cは略円弧を形成する。左端21Cの最も右側の位置は、第2筐体1022の左端22C、及び、第3筐体1023の左端23Cのそれぞれの最も左側の位置よりも、右側に配置される。図13に示すように、第4筐体24の左端24Cの最も左側の位置は、左端21C、22C、23Cのそれぞれの最も左側の位置よりも、右側に配置される。 As shown in FIG. 11, the left end 21 </ b> C of the first housing 1021 is recessed rightward from both ends in the vertical direction toward the center in the vertical direction. The left end 21C forms a substantially arc. The rightmost position of the left end 21C is arranged on the right side of the leftmost position of the left end 22C of the second casing 1022 and the left end 23C of the third casing 1023. As shown in FIG. 13, the leftmost position of the left end 24C of the fourth housing 24 is arranged on the right side of the leftmost positions of the left ends 21C, 22C, and 23C.
 以下、第1筐体1021、第2筐体1022、第3筐体1023、及び、第4筐体24のそれぞれのうち、後述するレンズユニット6(図15参照)よりも左側の部分を、それぞれ、第1延出部1021A、第2延出部22A、第3延出部1023A、及び、第4延出部24Aという。第1延出部1021Aは、レンズユニット6の左端と、左端21Cとの間に延びる部分に対応する。第2延出部22Aは、レンズユニット6の左端と、左端22Cとの間に延びる部分に対応する。第3延出部1023Aは、レンズユニット6の左端と、左端23Cとの間に延びる部分に対応する。第4延出部24Aは、レンズユニット6の左端と、左端24Cとの間に延びる部分に対応する。第1延出部1021Aの上側は、第2延出部22Aの前側に接続する。第1延出部1021Aの下側は、第3延出部1023Aの前側に接続する。第1延出部1021Aの後側の面、第2延出部22Aの下側の面、及び、第3延出部1023Aの上側の面を、それぞれ、第1裏面21B、第2裏面22B、第3裏面1023Bという。第2裏面22B及び第3裏面1023Bは対向する。 Hereinafter, of each of the first housing 1021, the second housing 1022, the third housing 1023, and the fourth housing 24, the portion on the left side of the lens unit 6 (see FIG. 15), which will be described later, The first extension portion 1021A, the second extension portion 22A, the third extension portion 1023A, and the fourth extension portion 24A. The first extending portion 1021A corresponds to a portion extending between the left end of the lens unit 6 and the left end 21C. The second extending portion 22A corresponds to a portion extending between the left end of the lens unit 6 and the left end 22C. The third extending portion 1023A corresponds to a portion extending between the left end of the lens unit 6 and the left end 23C. The fourth extending portion 24A corresponds to a portion extending between the left end of the lens unit 6 and the left end 24C. The upper side of the first extension part 1021A is connected to the front side of the second extension part 22A. The lower side of the first extension part 1021A is connected to the front side of the third extension part 1023A. The rear surface of the first extension portion 1021A, the lower surface of the second extension portion 22A, and the upper surface of the third extension portion 1023A are respectively a first back surface 21B, a second back surface 22B, This is referred to as a third back surface 1023B. The second back surface 22B and the third back surface 1023B face each other.
 図13、図14に示すように、第2裏面22Bの前側に、前側第1規制部材221Aが設けられる。前側第1規制部材221Aは、第2裏面22Bのうち湾曲部分212(図10参照)の内側から下方に延びる板状の部材である。図5に示すように、第3裏面1023Bの前側に、前側第1規制部材231Aが設けられる。前側第1規制部材231Aは、第3裏面1023Bのうち湾曲部分213(図10参照)の内側から上方に延びる板状の部材である。前側第1規制部材221A、231Aのそれぞれの両面は、左右方向を向く。前側第1規制部材221A、231Aのそれぞれの左右方向の位置は等しい。 As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, a front first regulating member 221A is provided on the front side of the second back surface 22B. The front first regulating member 221A is a plate-like member that extends downward from the inside of the curved portion 212 (see FIG. 10) of the second back surface 22B. As shown in FIG. 5, a front first regulating member 231A is provided on the front side of the third back surface 1023B. The front first regulating member 231A is a plate-like member extending upward from the inside of the curved portion 213 (see FIG. 10) in the third back surface 1023B. Both surfaces of the front first regulating members 221A and 231A face in the left-right direction. The positions in the left-right direction of the first front regulating members 221A and 231A are equal.
 図13に示すように、第2裏面22Bの後側に、後側第1規制部材221Bが設けられる。後側第1規制部材221Bは、第2延出部22Aの後端に沿って下方に延びる板状の部材である。第3裏面1023Bの後側に、後側第1規制部材231Bが設けられる。後側第1規制部材231Bは、第3延出部1023Aの後端に沿って上方に延びる板状の部材である。後側第1規制部材221B、231Bのそれぞれの両面は、前後方向を向く。前側第1規制部材221A、231Aの左右方向の位置と、後側第1規制部材221B、231Bの右端の左右方向の位置とは略等しい。後側第1規制部材221Bの右端、第4筐体24の左端24Cの上端、及び第2裏面22Bは、上方に凹んだ溝部221Cを形成する。後側第1規制部材231Bの右端、第4筐体24の左端24Cの下端、及び第3裏面1023Bは、下方に凹んだ溝部231Cを形成する。 As shown in FIG. 13, a rear first regulating member 221B is provided on the rear side of the second back surface 22B. The rear first regulating member 221B is a plate-like member that extends downward along the rear end of the second extending portion 22A. A rear first restriction member 231B is provided on the rear side of the third back surface 1023B. The rear first regulating member 231B is a plate-like member extending upward along the rear end of the third extending portion 1023A. Both surfaces of the rear first regulating members 221B and 231B face in the front-rear direction. The position in the left-right direction of the front first restriction members 221A and 231A is substantially equal to the position in the left-right direction of the right end of the rear first restriction members 221B and 231B. The right end of the rear first regulating member 221B, the upper end of the left end 24C of the fourth housing 24, and the second back surface 22B form a groove 221C that is recessed upward. The right end of the rear first restriction member 231B, the lower end of the left end 24C of the fourth housing 24, and the third back surface 1023B form a groove 231C that is recessed downward.
 図13、図14に示すように、第1筐体1021の上下方向中心、且つ、筐体12の左右方向中心よりも左側に、前後方向に貫通する穴21Dが設けられる。穴21Dには、後述する調節機構4の突出部4A(図15参照)が後側から嵌る。第1筐体1021の穴21Dの周囲に、後方に向けて円形に凹んだ凹部21Eが設けられる。凹部21Eには、後述する操作部材3(図15参照)が前側から嵌る。第1裏面21Bのうち、凹部21Eの左側、且つ左端21Cの近傍に、第2規制部材211が設けられる。第2規制部材211は、第1裏面21Bの上下方向中心を含む位置から、後方に延びる板状の部材である。第2規制部材211は、例えば、第1裏面21Bの上下方向中心を通り,且つ、前後左右方向に平行な面に対して、対称に設けられる。第2規制部材211の両面は、左右方向を向く。図14に示すように、第2規制部材211は、前側第1規制部材221A、231Aのそれぞれの左右方向の位置よりも、右側に配置される。図13に示すように、第2規制部材211は、後側第1規制部材221B、231Bのそれぞれの右端の左右方向の位置よりも、右側に配置される。前側第1規制部材221A、231A、及び、後側第1規制部材221B、231Bのそれぞれの右端と、第2規制部材211の左端との間の左右方向の長さは、後述するホルダ5(図20参照)の第1端部51(図20参照)の左右方向の長さ(厚さ)と等しい。 As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, a hole 21 </ b> D penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at the center in the vertical direction of the first housing 1021 and on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction of the housing 12. A protrusion 4A (see FIG. 15) of the adjusting mechanism 4 described later fits into the hole 21D from the rear side. Around the hole 21D of the first housing 1021, a recess 21E that is recessed in a circular shape toward the rear is provided. An operation member 3 (see FIG. 15) to be described later fits into the recess 21E from the front side. In the first back surface 21B, the second regulating member 211 is provided on the left side of the recess 21E and in the vicinity of the left end 21C. The second restricting member 211 is a plate-like member extending rearward from a position including the center in the vertical direction of the first back surface 21B. For example, the second regulating member 211 is provided symmetrically with respect to a plane that passes through the center of the first back surface 21B in the vertical direction and is parallel to the front-rear and left-right directions. Both surfaces of the second regulating member 211 face in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 14, the second restricting member 211 is disposed on the right side of the left and right positions of the front first restricting members 221 </ b> A and 231 </ b> A. As shown in FIG. 13, the second restriction member 211 is disposed on the right side of the position in the left-right direction of the right end of each of the rear first restriction members 221 </ b> B and 231 </ b> B. The length in the left-right direction between the right end of each of the front first regulating members 221A, 231A and the rear first regulating members 221B, 231B and the left end of the second regulating member 211 is a holder 5 (see FIG. 20) is equal to the length (thickness) in the left-right direction of the first end 51 (see FIG. 20).
 図13に示すように、第4筐体24のうち、筐体12の左右方向中心よりも右側に、前後方向に貫通する複数の穴24D、及び、複数の穴24Eが設けられる。複数の穴24Dのそれぞれは、後述する画像ユニット7を筐体12に取り付けるための複数の螺子穴である。複数の穴24Eのそれぞれは、接続具9を筐体12に取り付けるための複数の螺子穴である。突出部12Bの後端に、前後方向に貫通する穴25Dが設けられる。穴25Dには、通信線28(図11参照)が接続される。HMD101は、外部機器(図示略)と通信線28を介して接続される。外部機器は、HMD101に画像データを出力する。 As shown in FIG. 13, a plurality of holes 24 </ b> D and a plurality of holes 24 </ b> E penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided in the fourth housing 24 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the housing 12. Each of the plurality of holes 24 </ b> D is a plurality of screw holes for attaching an image unit 7 described later to the housing 12. Each of the plurality of holes 24 </ b> E is a plurality of screw holes for attaching the connector 9 to the housing 12. A hole 25D penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at the rear end of the protruding portion 12B. A communication line 28 (see FIG. 11) is connected to the hole 25D. The HMD 101 is connected to an external device (not shown) via the communication line 28. The external device outputs image data to the HMD 101.
 第4筐体24の第4延出部24A、より具体的には、第4筐体24の左端24Cに、筐体係合部241が設けられる。筐体係合部241は、第4筐体24の左端24Cの上下方向中心を含む位置から、左方に延びる板状の部材である。筐体係合部241は、例えば、左端24Cの上下方向中心を通り、且つ、前後左右方向に平行な面に対して、対称に設けられる。 The housing engaging portion 241 is provided at the fourth extending portion 24A of the fourth housing 24, more specifically, at the left end 24C of the fourth housing 24. The housing engaging portion 241 is a plate-like member that extends leftward from a position including the center in the vertical direction of the left end 24 </ b> C of the fourth housing 24. The housing engaging portion 241 is provided symmetrically with respect to a plane that passes through the center of the left end 24C in the up-down direction and is parallel to the front-rear left-right direction, for example.
 図15に示すように、筐体12は、前側筐体13と後側筐体14とを組み合わせることによって形成される。前側筐体13は、第1筐体1021、第2筐体1022及び第3筐体1023のそれぞれの前側部分、及び、第5筐体25を有する。後側筐体14は、第2筐体1022及び第3筐体1023のそれぞれの後側部分、及び、第4筐体24を有する。レンズユニット6、画像ユニット7、及び、調節機構4の係合部4Bは、筐体12内に配置される。ホルダ5は、筐体12の左端に保持される。ホルダ5、レンズユニット6、及び、画像ユニット7は、左側から右側に向けて順番に並ぶ。調節機構4は、レンズユニット6の前側に配置される。後側筐体14の後端部(第4筐体24)の前側の面、即ち、第4筐体24の内側面のうち、上下方向中心を含む位置に、後方に向けて凹んだ溝部242が設けられる。溝部242は、例えば、第4筐体24の内側面の上下方向中心を通り、且つ、前後左右方向に平行な面に対して、対称に設けられる。溝部242は左右方向に一直線状に延びる。 As shown in FIG. 15, the housing 12 is formed by combining a front housing 13 and a rear housing 14. The front housing 13 includes a front housing portion of each of the first housing 1021, the second housing 1022, and the third housing 1023, and a fifth housing 25. The rear housing 14 includes rear portions of the second housing 1022 and the third housing 1023, and a fourth housing 24. The lens unit 6, the image unit 7, and the engaging portion 4 </ b> B of the adjusting mechanism 4 are disposed in the housing 12. The holder 5 is held at the left end of the housing 12. The holder 5, the lens unit 6, and the image unit 7 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side. The adjustment mechanism 4 is disposed on the front side of the lens unit 6. A groove 242 that is recessed rearward at a position including the center in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rear end portion (fourth housing 24) of the rear housing 14, that is, the inner surface of the fourth housing 24. Is provided. For example, the groove 242 is provided symmetrically with respect to a plane that passes through the center of the inner surface of the fourth housing 24 in the vertical direction and is parallel to the front-rear and left-right directions. The groove portion 242 extends in a straight line in the left-right direction.
<画像ユニット7>
 画像ユニット7は、通信線28(図11参照)を介して外部機器から受信した画像データに応じた画像の画像光を生成し、射出する。図15に示すように、画像ユニット7は、第1保持部材1071、液晶表示装置1072、及び、第2保持部材1073を有する。
<Image unit 7>
The image unit 7 generates and emits image light of an image corresponding to image data received from an external device via the communication line 28 (see FIG. 11). As shown in FIG. 15, the image unit 7 includes a first holding member 1071, a liquid crystal display device 1072, and a second holding member 1073.
 第1保持部材1071は、円筒部材71A、側板部材71B、71C、71Dを有する。円筒部材71Aは、左右方向に延びる略円筒状の部材である。後述する複数のレンズ63のそれぞれの光軸77(図16参照)は、円筒部材71Aの中心を左右方向に延びる軸線上に配置される。図16に示すように、円筒部材71Aの上側部分及び下側部分のそれぞれは湾曲せず、上下方向と直交する平面に沿って延びる。以下、円筒部材71Aの上側部分を、平面部713という。円筒部材71Aの下側部分を、平面部714という。円筒部材71Aの平面部713、714以外の部分、言い換えれば、円筒部材71Aの前側部分及び後側部分を、湾曲部715という。光軸77から平面部713、714までの長さは、光軸77から湾曲部715までの長さ以下となる。光軸77から平面部713、714までの長さは、平面部713、714のそれぞれの前後方向中心で最も短くなる。平面部713の前後方向中心を含む位置に、内側の面が上側に凹んだ溝部713Aが設けられる。溝部713Aは、例えば、平面部713の前後方向中心を通り、且つ、上下左右方向に平行な面に対して、対称に設けられる。平面部714の前後方向中心を含む位置に、内側の面が下側に凹んだ溝部714Aが設けられる。溝部714Aは、例えば、平面部714の前後方向中心を通り、且つ、上下左右方向に平行な面に対して、対称に設けられる。溝部713A、714Aのそれぞれは、円筒部材71Aの左右両端部の間に亙って延びる。 The first holding member 1071 includes a cylindrical member 71A and side plate members 71B, 71C, 71D. The cylindrical member 71A is a substantially cylindrical member extending in the left-right direction. Each optical axis 77 (see FIG. 16) of a plurality of lenses 63 to be described later is disposed on an axis extending in the left-right direction at the center of the cylindrical member 71A. As shown in FIG. 16, each of the upper part and the lower part of the cylindrical member 71 </ b> A is not curved and extends along a plane orthogonal to the vertical direction. Hereinafter, the upper portion of the cylindrical member 71A is referred to as a plane portion 713. The lower portion of the cylindrical member 71A is referred to as a plane portion 714. The portions other than the flat portions 713 and 714 of the cylindrical member 71A, in other words, the front side portion and the rear side portion of the cylindrical member 71A are referred to as a curved portion 715. The length from the optical axis 77 to the plane portions 713 and 714 is equal to or shorter than the length from the optical axis 77 to the curved portion 715. The length from the optical axis 77 to the plane portions 713 and 714 is the shortest at the center in the front-rear direction of each of the plane portions 713 and 714. A groove portion 713A having an inner surface recessed upward is provided at a position including the front-rear direction center of the flat surface portion 713. The groove portion 713A is provided symmetrically with respect to a plane that passes through the center in the front-rear direction of the plane portion 713 and is parallel to the up-down and left-right directions, for example. A groove portion 714A having an inner surface recessed downward is provided at a position including the front-rear direction center of the flat portion 714. For example, the groove 714A is provided symmetrically with respect to a plane that passes through the center in the front-rear direction of the plane part 714 and is parallel to the upper, lower, left, and right directions. Each of the groove portions 713A and 714A extends between both left and right end portions of the cylindrical member 71A.
 図15に示すように、側板部材71B、71C、71Dは、それぞれ、円筒部材71Aの右端部から右側に延びる平面板状の部材である。側板部材71B、71Cのそれぞれの複数の互いに平行な一対の平面のうち、面積の最も大きい一対の平面のそれぞれは、前後方向を向く。側板部材71Dの複数の互いに平行な一対の平面のうち、面積の最も大きい一対の平面のそれぞれは、上下方向を向く。側板部材71Bの下端は、側板部材71Dの前端に接続し、側板部材71Cの下端は、側板部材71Dの後端に接続する。複数の穴24D(図13参照)に挿入される螺子は、側板部材71Cに設けられた螺子穴711に締められる。これによって、画像ユニット7は、筐体12のうち後側筐体14に保持され、筐体12に対する位置が固定される。 As shown in FIG. 15, the side plate members 71B, 71C, 71D are flat plate-like members extending from the right end portion of the cylindrical member 71A to the right side. Of the plurality of parallel planes of the side plate members 71B and 71C, each of the pair of planes having the largest area faces the front-rear direction. Of the plurality of parallel planes of the side plate member 71D, each of the pair of planes having the largest area faces in the vertical direction. The lower end of the side plate member 71B is connected to the front end of the side plate member 71D, and the lower end of the side plate member 71C is connected to the rear end of the side plate member 71D. Screws inserted into the plurality of holes 24D (see FIG. 13) are fastened to screw holes 711 provided in the side plate member 71C. As a result, the image unit 7 is held by the rear housing 14 of the housing 12 and the position with respect to the housing 12 is fixed.
 図16に示すように、画像ユニット7は、側板部材71Bから前方に向けて突出する突出部712A、712B、712Cを有する。突出部712A、712B、712Cは板状である。突出部712A、712Bは左右方向に平行に延びる。突出部712Aは、突出部712Bよりも上側に配置される。突出部712Cは上下方向に延びる。突出部712Cの上端は、突出部712Aの右端に接続し、突出部712Cの下端は、突出部712Bの右端に接続する。突出部712A、712B、712Cのそれぞれの前端部の前後方向の位置は同一である。即ち、突出部712A、712B、712Cのそれぞれの前端部は、前後方向と直交する仮想的な平面上に配置される。以下、突出部712A、712B、712Cを総称して、突出部712という。 As shown in FIG. 16, the image unit 7 has projecting portions 712A, 712B, and 712C that project forward from the side plate member 71B. The protrusions 712A, 712B, 712C are plate-shaped. The protrusions 712A and 712B extend in parallel in the left-right direction. The protrusion 712A is disposed above the protrusion 712B. The protruding portion 712C extends in the vertical direction. The upper end of the protrusion 712C is connected to the right end of the protrusion 712A, and the lower end of the protrusion 712C is connected to the right end of the protrusion 712B. The front-rear direction positions of the front end portions of the projecting portions 712A, 712B, and 712C are the same. That is, the front end portions of the projecting portions 712A, 712B, and 712C are arranged on a virtual plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction. Hereinafter, the protruding portions 712A, 712B, and 712C are collectively referred to as the protruding portion 712.
 図15に示すように、液晶表示装置1072は、ガラス基板1072A及び液晶パネル72Bを有する。ガラス基板1072A及び液晶パネル72Bは、第1保持部材1071のうち側板部材71B、71C、71Dで囲まれた部分に配置される。液晶パネル72Bは矩形状の周知の液晶パネルである。液晶パネル72Bは、左側面に画像を表示させることによって、画像光を生成する。ガラス基板1072Aは、液晶パネル72Bの左側面に設けられ、液晶パネル72Bの表示面を保護する。例えば、液晶パネル72Bが反射型液晶の場合、光源(非図示)からの光が液晶パネル72Bに入射する。液晶パネル72Bは、入射した光を反射することで、画像光を生成する。液晶パネル72Bによって生成された画像光は、ガラス基板1072Aを左側に透過する。 As shown in FIG. 15, the liquid crystal display device 1072 has a glass substrate 1072A and a liquid crystal panel 72B. The glass substrate 1072A and the liquid crystal panel 72B are disposed in a portion of the first holding member 1071 surrounded by the side plate members 71B, 71C, 71D. The liquid crystal panel 72B is a well-known rectangular liquid crystal panel. The liquid crystal panel 72B generates image light by displaying an image on the left side surface. The glass substrate 1072A is provided on the left side surface of the liquid crystal panel 72B, and protects the display surface of the liquid crystal panel 72B. For example, when the liquid crystal panel 72B is a reflective liquid crystal, light from a light source (not shown) enters the liquid crystal panel 72B. The liquid crystal panel 72B reflects the incident light to generate image light. The image light generated by the liquid crystal panel 72B passes through the glass substrate 1072A to the left.
 第2保持部材1073は、基板保持部分73A及び制御基板73Bを有する。基板保持部分73Aは、液晶表示装置1072の液晶パネル72Bの右側に配置される。制御基板73Bは、基板保持部分73Aの右側に配置される。制御基板73Bは、フレキシブルプリント基板(図示略)を介して液晶パネル72Bに接続される。制御基板73Bに通信線28(図11参照)が接続される。制御基板73Bは、外部機器から送信された画像データを、通信線28を介して受信する。制御基板73Bは、フレキシブルプリント基板を介して液晶パネル72Bに制御信号を出力することによって、画像データに応じた画像を液晶パネル72Bに表示させる。 The second holding member 1073 has a substrate holding portion 73A and a control substrate 73B. The substrate holding portion 73A is disposed on the right side of the liquid crystal panel 72B of the liquid crystal display device 1072. The control board 73B is disposed on the right side of the board holding portion 73A. The control board 73B is connected to the liquid crystal panel 72B via a flexible printed board (not shown). The communication line 28 (see FIG. 11) is connected to the control board 73B. The control board 73 </ b> B receives the image data transmitted from the external device via the communication line 28. The control board 73B outputs a control signal to the liquid crystal panel 72B via the flexible printed board, thereby causing the liquid crystal panel 72B to display an image corresponding to the image data.
 なお、本発明において、液晶パネル72Bの代わりに、Digital Mirror Device(DMD)、有機EL等の二次元表示装置が用いられてもよい。更に、2次元的に走査された光を使用者の網膜上に投影する網膜走査型の投影装置(Retinal Scanning Display)が用いられてもよい。 In the present invention, a two-dimensional display device such as a digital mirror device (DMD) or an organic EL may be used instead of the liquid crystal panel 72B. Further, a retina scanning type projection device (Retinal Scanning Display) that projects light two-dimensionally scanned onto the retina of the user may be used.
<レンズユニット6>
 レンズユニット6は、画像ユニット7の左側に配置される。レンズユニット6は、画像ユニット7から射出された画像光を、レンズユニット6の左側に配置されたハーフミラー56に導く。レンズユニット6は、保持部材61、円筒部材62、及び、複数のレンズ63を有する。
<Lens unit 6>
The lens unit 6 is disposed on the left side of the image unit 7. The lens unit 6 guides the image light emitted from the image unit 7 to the half mirror 56 disposed on the left side of the lens unit 6. The lens unit 6 includes a holding member 61, a cylindrical member 62, and a plurality of lenses 63.
 保持部材61は、左右方向に延びる略円筒状の部材である。保持部材61の内側に複数のレンズ63が固定されている。複数のレンズ63のそれぞれの光軸は、保持部材61の中心を左右方向に延びる軸線上に配置されている。図18に示すように、保持部材61の上側部分及び下側部分のそれぞれは湾曲せず、上下方向と直交する平面に沿って延びる。以下、保持部材61の上側部分を、平面部61Cという。保持部材61の下側部分を、平面部61Dという。平面部61C、61Dのそれぞれの前端部の間に架設された湾曲部を、湾曲部61Aという。平面部61C、61Dのそれぞれの後端部の間に架設された湾曲部を、湾曲部61Bという。 The holding member 61 is a substantially cylindrical member extending in the left-right direction. A plurality of lenses 63 are fixed inside the holding member 61. Each optical axis of the plurality of lenses 63 is disposed on an axis extending in the left-right direction at the center of the holding member 61. As shown in FIG. 18, each of the upper part and the lower part of the holding member 61 is not curved and extends along a plane orthogonal to the vertical direction. Hereinafter, the upper part of the holding member 61 is referred to as a plane portion 61C. The lower part of the holding member 61 is referred to as a plane part 61D. A bending portion constructed between the front end portions of the plane portions 61C and 61D is referred to as a bending portion 61A. A bending portion constructed between the rear end portions of the plane portions 61C and 61D is referred to as a bending portion 61B.
 湾曲部61Aのうち上下方向中心を含む位置に、前方に向けて突出する突出部64が設けられる。突出部64は、例えば、湾曲部61Aの上下方向中心を通り、且つ、前後左右方向に平行な面に対して、対称に設けられる。突出部64は円柱状である。突出部64は、後述する調節機構4の係合部4Bのカム溝42(図19参照)に嵌る。湾曲部61Bのうち上下方向中心を含む位置に、後方に向けて突出する突出部65が設けられる。突出部65は、例えば、湾曲部61Bの上下方向中心を通り、且つ、前後左右方向に平行な面に対して、対称に設けられる。図17に示すように、突出部65は棒状である。突出部65の左右方向の長さは、上下方向の長さよりも長い。突出部65は、第4筐体24の溝部242(図15参照)に嵌る。これによって、レンズユニット6は、筐体12のうち後側筐体14に左右方向に移動可能に保持される。 A protruding portion 64 that protrudes forward is provided at a position including the center in the vertical direction in the curved portion 61A. For example, the protruding portion 64 is provided symmetrically with respect to a plane that passes through the center of the bending portion 61A in the vertical direction and is parallel to the front-rear and left-right directions. The protrusion 64 is cylindrical. The protrusion 64 fits in the cam groove 42 (see FIG. 19) of the engaging portion 4B of the adjusting mechanism 4 described later. A protruding portion 65 that protrudes rearward is provided at a position including the center in the vertical direction in the curved portion 61B. For example, the protruding portion 65 is provided symmetrically with respect to a plane that passes through the center of the bending portion 61B in the vertical direction and is parallel to the front-rear and left-right directions. As shown in FIG. 17, the protrusion 65 is rod-shaped. The length of the protrusion 65 in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the up-down direction. The protrusion 65 fits into the groove 242 (see FIG. 15) of the fourth housing 24. Accordingly, the lens unit 6 is held by the rear housing 14 of the housing 12 so as to be movable in the left-right direction.
 図15に示すように、円筒部材62は、左右方向に延びる略円筒状の部材である。円筒部材62は、保持部材61の右側に設けられる。複数のレンズ63のそれぞれの光軸77(図18参照)は、円筒部材62の中心を左右方向に延びる軸線上に配置される。図18に示すように、円筒部材62の上側部分及び下側部分のそれぞれは湾曲せず、上下方向と直交する平面に沿って延びる。以下、円筒部材62の上側部分を、平面部62Cという。円筒部材62の下側部分を、平面部62Dという。円筒部材62の平面部62C、62D以外の部分、言い換えれば、円筒部材62の前側部分及び後側部分を、湾曲部62Aという。光軸77から平面部62C、62Dまでの長さは、光軸77から湾曲部62Aまでの長さ以下となる。光軸77から平面部62C、62Dまでの長さは、平面部62C、62Dのそれぞれの前後方向中心で最も短くなる。平面部62Cの前後方向中心を含む位置に、外側の面から上側に突出する突出部621Cが設けられる。突出部621Cは、例えば、平面部62Cの前後方向中心を通り、且つ、上下左右方向に平行な面に対して、対称に設けられる。平面部62Dの前後方向中心を含む位置に、外側の面から下側に突出した突出部621Dが設けられる。突出部621Dは、例えば、平面部62Dの前後方向中心を通り、且つ、上下左右方向に平行な面に対して、対称に設けられる。突出部621C、621Dのそれぞれは、円筒部材62の左右両端部の間に亙って延びる。突出部621C、621Dのそれぞれの前後方向の長さは、溝部713A、714A(図16参照)のそれぞれの前後方向の長さと略同一である。 As shown in FIG. 15, the cylindrical member 62 is a substantially cylindrical member extending in the left-right direction. The cylindrical member 62 is provided on the right side of the holding member 61. Each optical axis 77 (see FIG. 18) of the plurality of lenses 63 is disposed on an axis extending in the left-right direction at the center of the cylindrical member 62. As shown in FIG. 18, each of the upper part and the lower part of the cylindrical member 62 is not curved and extends along a plane orthogonal to the vertical direction. Hereinafter, the upper part of the cylindrical member 62 is referred to as a plane part 62C. The lower part of the cylindrical member 62 is referred to as a plane part 62D. Portions other than the flat portions 62C and 62D of the cylindrical member 62, in other words, the front side portion and the rear side portion of the cylindrical member 62 are referred to as a curved portion 62A. The length from the optical axis 77 to the plane portions 62C and 62D is equal to or shorter than the length from the optical axis 77 to the curved portion 62A. The length from the optical axis 77 to the plane portions 62C and 62D is the shortest at the front-rear direction center of each of the plane portions 62C and 62D. A protruding portion 621C that protrudes upward from the outer surface is provided at a position including the center in the front-rear direction of the flat portion 62C. For example, the protruding portion 621C is provided symmetrically with respect to a plane that passes through the center in the front-rear direction of the plane portion 62C and is parallel to the upper, lower, left, and right directions. A protruding portion 621D that protrudes downward from the outer surface is provided at a position including the center in the front-rear direction of the flat portion 62D. For example, the protruding portion 621D is provided symmetrically with respect to a plane that passes through the center in the front-rear direction of the plane portion 62D and is parallel to the up-down and left-right directions. Each of the protrusions 621 </ b> C and 621 </ b> D extends across the left and right ends of the cylindrical member 62. The lengths of the protrusions 621C and 621D in the front-rear direction are substantially the same as the lengths of the grooves 713A and 714A (see FIG. 16), respectively.
 レンズユニット6の円筒部材62の外側の壁面の断面形状と、画像ユニット7の円筒部材71Aの円筒部材71Aの内側の壁面の断面形状とは、略等しい。円筒部材62の右側の少なくとも一部は、円筒部材71Aの左側の少なくとも一部の内側に嵌る。この状態で、円筒部材71Aの左端部は、円筒部材62の右端部よりも左側に配置される。円筒部材62と円筒部材71Aとは、左右方向に重複する。このとき、円筒部材62の突出部621Cの右側の少なくとも一部は、円筒部材71Aとの左右方向の重複部分で、溝部713Aの左側の少なくとも一部に嵌る。円筒部材62の突出部621Dの右側の少なくとも一部は、円筒部材71Aとの左右方向の重複部分で、円筒部材71Aの溝部714Aの左側の少なくとも一部に嵌る。 The sectional shape of the outer wall surface of the cylindrical member 62 of the lens unit 6 and the sectional shape of the inner wall surface of the cylindrical member 71A of the cylindrical member 71A of the image unit 7 are substantially equal. At least a part of the right side of the cylindrical member 62 fits inside at least a part of the left side of the cylindrical member 71A. In this state, the left end portion of the cylindrical member 71 </ b> A is disposed on the left side of the right end portion of the cylindrical member 62. The cylindrical member 62 and the cylindrical member 71A overlap in the left-right direction. At this time, at least a part on the right side of the protruding portion 621C of the cylindrical member 62 is an overlapping portion in the left-right direction with the cylindrical member 71A, and fits into at least a part on the left side of the groove portion 713A. At least a part on the right side of the protruding part 621D of the cylindrical member 62 is an overlapping part in the left-right direction with the cylindrical member 71A and fits to at least a part on the left side of the groove part 714A of the cylindrical member 71A.
 画像ユニット7によって生成された画像光は、円筒部材62の内部に右側から入射し、保持部材61及び円筒部材62内部を通過し、保持部材61の左端から左側に向けて射出する。複数のレンズ63は、右側から入射する画像光を屈折させ、左側に出射させる。 The image light generated by the image unit 7 enters the inside of the cylindrical member 62 from the right side, passes through the holding member 61 and the inside of the cylindrical member 62, and exits from the left end of the holding member 61 toward the left side. The plurality of lenses 63 refracts image light incident from the right side and emits it to the left side.
<操作部材3>
 図15に示すように、操作部材3は円錐台状の部材である。操作部材3の中心軸は、前後方向に延びる。操作部材3は、中心軸を支点として回動可能である。操作部材3は、前端面3A、後端面3B、及び、側面3Cを有する。前端面3Aは、操作部材3の前側の底部である。前端面3Aは、円錐台形状の上底に対応する。後端面3Bは、操作部材3の後側の底面である。後端面3Bは、円錐台形状の下底に対応する。前端面3A及び後端面3Bは、それぞれ、前後方向に直交する。後端面3Bには、調節機構4の突出部4A(後述)が嵌合する嵌合溝(図示略)が設けられている。側面3Cは、円錐台形状の側面に対応する。側面3Cには、前後方向に延びる複数の凹凸が設けられている。凹凸は、使用者が指を側面3Cに接触させて力を加えた場合に、操作部材3に対して指が滑ることを防止する。
<Operation member 3>
As shown in FIG. 15, the operation member 3 is a truncated cone-shaped member. The central axis of the operation member 3 extends in the front-rear direction. The operation member 3 can be rotated with the central axis as a fulcrum. The operation member 3 has a front end surface 3A, a rear end surface 3B, and a side surface 3C. The front end surface 3 </ b> A is a bottom portion on the front side of the operation member 3. The front end surface 3A corresponds to the upper base of the truncated cone shape. The rear end surface 3 </ b> B is a bottom surface on the rear side of the operation member 3. The rear end surface 3B corresponds to the lower base of the truncated cone shape. The front end surface 3A and the rear end surface 3B are orthogonal to the front-rear direction. The rear end surface 3B is provided with a fitting groove (not shown) into which a protruding portion 4A (described later) of the adjusting mechanism 4 is fitted. The side surface 3C corresponds to a frustoconical side surface. The side surface 3C is provided with a plurality of projections and depressions extending in the front-rear direction. The unevenness prevents the finger from slipping on the operation member 3 when the user applies a force by bringing the finger into contact with the side surface 3C.
 後端面3Bは、第1筐体1021に設けられた凹部21Eに嵌る。なお、凹部21Eは、第1筐体1021のうち筐体12の左右方向中心よりも左側に設けられているので、操作部材3は、筐体12の左右方向中心よりも左側に配置される。前端面3Aと後端面3Bとの間の距離、即ち、操作部材3の前後方向の長さLhは、使用者が側面3Cに指を接触させて操作部材を回転させるために適切な所定の長さ(例えば3mm)に設定される。なお、後端面3Bの前後方向の位置は、第1筐体1021の第1表面21Mのうち操作部材3が設けられる部分の前後方向の位置と略等しい。従って、図12に示すように、操作部材3の第1表面21Mに対する高さ(=長さLh)は3mmになる。なお、本発明において、長さLhは3mmに限定されず、3mmよりも大きい値であってもよい。 The rear end surface 3B fits into a recess 21E provided in the first housing 1021. Since the recess 21E is provided on the left side of the first housing 1021 with respect to the left-right center of the housing 12, the operation member 3 is disposed on the left side of the left-right center of the housing 12. The distance between the front end surface 3A and the rear end surface 3B, that is, the length Lh in the front-rear direction of the operation member 3 is a predetermined length appropriate for the user to touch the side surface 3C to rotate the operation member. (For example, 3 mm). Note that the position in the front-rear direction of the rear end surface 3B is substantially equal to the position in the front-rear direction of the portion of the first surface 21M of the first housing 1021 where the operation member 3 is provided. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12, the height (= length Lh) of the operation member 3 with respect to the first surface 21M is 3 mm. In the present invention, the length Lh is not limited to 3 mm, and may be a value larger than 3 mm.
 図12に示すように、前端面3Aの直径Lfは、後端面3B(図15参照)の直径Lrよりも小さい。このため、操作部材3の左右方向の特定の位置(以下、「左右特定位置」という。)における前端面3Aの上下方向の長さは、左右特定位置における後端面3Bの上下方向の長さよりも常に短くなる。又、操作部材3の上下方向の特定の位置(以下、「上下特定位置」という。)における前端面3Aの左右方向の長さは、上下特定位置における後端面3Bの左右方向の長さよりも常に短くなる。又、操作部材3において、中心軸の延びる方向(前後方向)に対する側面3Cの角度θは、使用者が筐体12を親指と人差し指で上下から保持した状態で、中指の腹と側面3Cとが、操作を容易にする程度に平行となるように、所定の角度(例えば40度)に設定される。なお、本開示において、角度θは40度に限定されず、40度よりも小さい値であってもよい。 As shown in FIG. 12, the diameter Lf of the front end face 3A is smaller than the diameter Lr of the rear end face 3B (see FIG. 15). For this reason, the vertical length of the front end surface 3A at a specific position in the left-right direction of the operating member 3 (hereinafter referred to as “left-right specific position”) is larger than the vertical length of the rear end surface 3B at the specific left-right position. Always shorter. Further, the length in the left-right direction of the front end surface 3A at a specific position in the vertical direction of the operation member 3 (hereinafter referred to as “vertical specific position”) is always greater than the length in the left-right direction of the rear end surface 3B at the specific vertical position. Shorter. In the operation member 3, the angle θ of the side surface 3C with respect to the direction in which the central axis extends (the front-rear direction) is such that the middle finger and the side surface 3C are in a state where the user holds the housing 12 from above and below with the thumb and index finger. The predetermined angle (for example, 40 degrees) is set so as to be parallel to such an extent that the operation is facilitated. In the present disclosure, the angle θ is not limited to 40 degrees, and may be a value smaller than 40 degrees.
<調節機構4>
 図15に示すように、調節機構4は、突出部4A及び係合部4Bを有する。係合部4Bは円形板状の部材である。係合部4Bの平行に配置する両面は、前後方向を向く。係合部4Bの側面に、前後方向に延びる複数の凹部1041が設けられている。筐体12の内部に設けられた板バネ40は、複数の凹部1041の何れかに係合する。突出部4Aは、係合部4Bの円形の中心付近から前方に向けて突出する。突出部4Aは、第1筐体1021の穴21Dに後側から進入し、第1筐体1021の第1表面21Mの前側に突出する。突出部4Aのうち、第1表面21Mの前側に突出した部分の前端は、操作部材3の後端面3Bの嵌合溝(図示略)に嵌合する(図24、図25参照)。これによって、操作部材3及び調節機構4は、前側筐体13の第1筐体1021に保持される。調節機構4は、係合部4Bの円形中心を通って前後方向に延びる軸を支点として、操作部材3と一体となって回動可能である。なお、調節機構4は、操作部材3と一体に形成されてもよい。
<Adjustment mechanism 4>
As shown in FIG. 15, the adjustment mechanism 4 includes a protruding portion 4A and an engaging portion 4B. The engaging portion 4B is a circular plate member. Both surfaces of the engaging portion 4B arranged in parallel face in the front-rear direction. A plurality of concave portions 1041 extending in the front-rear direction are provided on the side surface of the engaging portion 4B. The leaf spring 40 provided inside the housing 12 engages with any of the plurality of recesses 1041. The protruding portion 4A protrudes forward from the vicinity of the circular center of the engaging portion 4B. The protruding portion 4A enters the hole 21D of the first housing 1021 from the rear side and protrudes to the front side of the first surface 21M of the first housing 1021. The front end of the protruding portion 4A that protrudes to the front side of the first surface 21M is fitted into a fitting groove (not shown) on the rear end surface 3B of the operation member 3 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). Accordingly, the operation member 3 and the adjustment mechanism 4 are held by the first housing 1021 of the front housing 13. The adjustment mechanism 4 can rotate integrally with the operation member 3 with an axis extending in the front-rear direction passing through the circular center of the engaging portion 4B as a fulcrum. The adjustment mechanism 4 may be formed integrally with the operation member 3.
 操作部材3及び調節機構4が第1筐体1021に保持された状態では、図12に示すように、後端面3B(図15参照)の直径Lrは、第1表面21Mの上下方向の長さ、詳細には、接続位置212Sと接続位置213Sとの間の上下方向の長さL1よりも短い。後端面3Bの上側の端部は、第1表面21Mの上側の端部、即ち、接続位置212Sよりも下側に配置され、後端面3Bの下側の端部は、第1表面21Mの下側の端部、即ち、接続位置213Sよりも上側に配置される。 In a state where the operation member 3 and the adjustment mechanism 4 are held by the first housing 1021, as shown in FIG. 12, the diameter Lr of the rear end surface 3B (see FIG. 15) is the length of the first surface 21M in the vertical direction. Specifically, it is shorter than the length L1 in the vertical direction between the connection position 212S and the connection position 213S. The upper end of the rear end surface 3B is disposed on the upper end of the first surface 21M, that is, below the connection position 212S, and the lower end of the rear end surface 3B is below the first surface 21M. It is arrange | positioned above the edge part of the side, ie, the connection position 213S.
 図19に示すように、係合部4Bの後側面にカム溝42が設けられる。カム溝42は、係合部4Bの後側面の一部が前方に向けて凹むことによって形成される。カム溝42は、係合部4Bの円形中心Xを支点として渦巻き状に延びる。カム溝42は、後側からみた状態で、時計回りに旋回するに従って円形中心Xから離間する。以下、カム溝42の形状を説明する場合には、後側から見た状態を前提とする。カム溝42は、第1端42Aと第2端42Bとを有する。第1端42Aは、カム溝42のうち時計回り方向の端部であり、第2端42Bは、反時計回り方向の端部である。円形中心Xから第1端42Aを通過して外側に延びる方向48と、円形中心Xから第2端42Bを通過して外側に延びる方向1049とのなす角度のうち、カム溝42側の角度φは、120度である。なお、本開示において、角度φは120度に限定されず、120度よりも小さい値であってもよい。カム溝42には、操作部材3及び調節機構4が第1筐体1021に保持された状態で、レンズユニット6の突出部64が後方から嵌る。 As shown in FIG. 19, a cam groove 42 is provided on the rear side surface of the engaging portion 4B. The cam groove 42 is formed when a part of the rear side surface of the engaging portion 4B is recessed forward. The cam groove 42 extends in a spiral shape with the circular center X of the engaging portion 4B as a fulcrum. The cam groove 42 is separated from the circular center X as it turns clockwise as viewed from the rear side. Hereinafter, when the shape of the cam groove 42 is described, it is assumed that the cam groove 42 is viewed from the rear side. The cam groove 42 has a first end 42A and a second end 42B. The first end 42A is an end portion in the clockwise direction of the cam groove 42, and the second end 42B is an end portion in the counterclockwise direction. Of the angles formed between the direction 48 extending outward from the circular center X through the first end 42A and the direction 1049 extending outward from the circular center X through the second end 42B, the angle φ on the cam groove 42 side Is 120 degrees. In the present disclosure, the angle φ is not limited to 120 degrees, and may be a value smaller than 120 degrees. The protruding portion 64 of the lens unit 6 is fitted into the cam groove 42 from behind in a state where the operation member 3 and the adjustment mechanism 4 are held by the first housing 1021.
<偏向ユニット59>
 偏向ユニット59は、ハーフミラー56及びホルダ5を有する。図15に示すように、ハーフミラー56は、レンズユニット6の左側に配置される。ハーフミラー56は、後述するホルダ5によって、筐体12に対する位置が固定される。このため、筐体12に対して固定的な位置に保持される画像ユニット7との間の距離は、固定的となる。ハーフミラー56は、レンズユニット6を通過して右側から入射する画像光を、後側に反射させることができる。使用者の眼は、ハーフミラー56によって後側に反射された画像光に基づいて、虚像を視認できる。又、ハーフミラー56は、前側から入射した外界の光を後側に透過させることができる。
<Deflection unit 59>
The deflection unit 59 includes a half mirror 56 and a holder 5. As shown in FIG. 15, the half mirror 56 is disposed on the left side of the lens unit 6. The position of the half mirror 56 with respect to the housing 12 is fixed by a holder 5 described later. For this reason, the distance from the image unit 7 held at a fixed position with respect to the housing 12 is fixed. The half mirror 56 can reflect image light that has passed through the lens unit 6 and is incident from the right side to the rear side. The user's eyes can visually recognize the virtual image based on the image light reflected to the rear side by the half mirror 56. Moreover, the half mirror 56 can transmit the external light incident from the front side to the rear side.
 ハーフミラー56は矩形板状である。ハーフミラー56は、例えば、透明な樹脂やガラスの基板上に、アルミや銀などの金属を所定の反射率(例えば50%)となるように蒸着することで構成される。ハーフミラー56は、後述するホルダ5によって保持される。ホルダ5に保持された状態のハーフミラー56の両面のうち一方の面56Bは、右斜め後方を向き、他方の面56Cは、左斜め前方を向く。ハーフミラー56は、面56B、56Cのそれぞれに入射した光の一部(例えば50%)を反射させ、他部を透過させることができる。 The half mirror 56 has a rectangular plate shape. The half mirror 56 is configured, for example, by vapor-depositing a metal such as aluminum or silver on a transparent resin or glass substrate so as to have a predetermined reflectance (for example, 50%). The half mirror 56 is held by a holder 5 described later. One surface 56B of both surfaces of the half mirror 56 held by the holder 5 faces diagonally right rearward, and the other surface 56C faces diagonally left frontward. The half mirror 56 can reflect a part (for example, 50%) of light incident on each of the surfaces 56B and 56C and transmit the other part.
 なお、本開示において、上記のハーフミラー56の代わりに、面56Bに入射した画像光を後側に全反射させることが可能な反射部材が用いられてもよい。又、ハーフミラー56の代わりに、プリズムや回折格子のような光路偏向部材が用いられてもよい。 In the present disclosure, instead of the half mirror 56 described above, a reflective member capable of totally reflecting the image light incident on the surface 56B to the rear side may be used. Further, instead of the half mirror 56, an optical path deflecting member such as a prism or a diffraction grating may be used.
 ホルダ5は、レンズユニット6の左側に配置され、ハーフミラー56を保持する。図20、図21に示すように、ホルダ5は基礎部材50を備える。基礎部材50は、それぞれが板状の第1端部51、第2端部52、第3端部53、及び、第4端部54を有する。第1端部51の3つの互いに平行な一対の平面のうち、面積の最も大きい一対の平面のそれぞれは、左右方向を向く。第1端部51の前端の上側及び下側の角は湾曲する。第2端部52は、第1端部51の後端部の上側から後方に延びる。第3端部53は、第1端部51の後端部の下側から後方に延びる。第2端部52及び第3端部53のそれぞれの3つの互いに平行な一対の平面のうち、面積の最も大きい一対の平面のそれぞれは、上下方向を向く。第4端部54は、第2端部52及び第3端部53のそれぞれの後端部の間に架設される。第4端部54の3つの互いに平行な一対の平面のうち、面積の最も大きい一対の平面のそれぞれは、前後方向を向く。第4端部54の左右方向の長さは、第2端部52及び第3端部53のそれぞれの左右方向の長さよりも短い。第1端部51、第2端部52、第3端部53、及び、第4端部54のそれぞれの右端の面の左右方向の位置は一致し、それぞれは同一平面を形成する。第1端部51~第4端部54によって囲まれた部分に、穴51Bが形成される。以下、図21に示すように、第1端部51、第2端部52、第3端部53、及び、第4端部54のそれぞれの右端の面を、それぞれ、第1端面51A、第2端面52A、第3端面53A、及び、第4端面54Aという。 The holder 5 is disposed on the left side of the lens unit 6 and holds the half mirror 56. As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the holder 5 includes a foundation member 50. The base member 50 has a plate-like first end 51, second end 52, third end 53, and fourth end 54. Of the three parallel planes of the first end 51, each of the pair of planes having the largest area faces in the left-right direction. The upper and lower corners of the front end of the first end 51 are curved. The second end 52 extends rearward from above the rear end of the first end 51. The third end portion 53 extends rearward from the lower side of the rear end portion of the first end portion 51. Of the three parallel planes of the second end portion 52 and the third end portion 53, each of the pair of planes having the largest area faces in the vertical direction. The fourth end portion 54 is constructed between the rear end portions of the second end portion 52 and the third end portion 53. Of the three parallel planes of the fourth end portion 54, each of the pair of planes having the largest area faces the front-rear direction. The length in the left-right direction of the fourth end portion 54 is shorter than the length in the left-right direction of each of the second end portion 52 and the third end portion 53. The positions of the right end surfaces of the first end portion 51, the second end portion 52, the third end portion 53, and the fourth end portion 54 in the left-right direction coincide with each other and form the same plane. A hole 51B is formed in a portion surrounded by the first end portion 51 to the fourth end portion. Hereinafter, as shown in FIG. 21, the right end surfaces of the first end portion 51, the second end portion 52, the third end portion 53, and the fourth end portion 54 are respectively referred to as the first end surface 51A and the first end surface 51A. These are referred to as a second end surface 52A, a third end surface 53A, and a fourth end surface 54A.
 図20に示すように、第2端部52の左前側の角の近傍に、上下方向に貫通する穴52Cが設けられる。第3端部53の左前側の角の近傍に、上下方向に貫通する穴53Cが設けられる。図15に示すように、ハーフミラー56の上端部から上方に突出する上側突出部56Aは、穴52Cに下方から嵌る。ハーフミラー56の下端部から下方に突出する下側突出部(図示略)は、穴53Cに上方から嵌る。ホルダ5は、ハーフミラー56の上側突出部56Aを穴52Cで支持し、且つ、ハーフミラー56の下側突出部(図示略)を穴53Cで支持することによって、ハーフミラー56を保持する。ハーフミラー56は、第1端面51A~第4端面54Aのそれぞれを含む平面に対して左側に配置される。 As shown in FIG. 20, a hole 52 </ b> C penetrating in the vertical direction is provided in the vicinity of the left front corner of the second end portion 52. A hole 53 </ b> C penetrating in the vertical direction is provided in the vicinity of the left front corner of the third end portion 53. As shown in FIG. 15, the upper protruding portion 56A protruding upward from the upper end portion of the half mirror 56 is fitted into the hole 52C from below. A lower protruding portion (not shown) protruding downward from the lower end portion of the half mirror 56 is fitted into the hole 53C from above. The holder 5 holds the half mirror 56 by supporting the upper protrusion 56A of the half mirror 56 through the hole 52C and supporting the lower protrusion (not shown) of the half mirror 56 through the hole 53C. The half mirror 56 is disposed on the left side with respect to a plane including each of the first end surface 51A to the fourth end surface 54A.
 図20、図21に示すように、第2端部52のうち、第4端部54と接続する部分の上面に、ホルダ突出部52Bが設けられる。ホルダ突出部52Bは、延設部521B、522Bを備える。延設部521Bは、第2端面52A(図21参照)に対して左方に突出する板状の部位である。延設部521Bの左右方向の長さは、第4延出部24Aの左端24Cの上端と、後側第1規制部材221Bの右端との間の左右方向の長さ(以下、「溝部221Cの左右方向の長さ」ともいう。)と等しい(図13参照)。延設部522Bは、延設部521Bの左端から前方に向けて延びる板状の部位である。第3端部53のうち、第4端部54と接続する部分の下面に、ホルダ突出部53Bが設けられる。ホルダ突出部53Bは、延設部531B、532Bを備える。延設部531Bは、第3端面53Aに対して左方に突出する板状の部位である。延設部531Bの左右方向の長さは、第4延出部24Aの左端24Cの下端と、後側第1規制部材231Bの右端との間の左右方向の長さ(以下、「溝部231Cの左右方向の長さ」ともいう。)と等しい。延設部532Bは、延設部531Bの左端から前方に向けて延びる板状の部位である。 As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, a holder protrusion 52 </ b> B is provided on the upper surface of the second end 52 that is connected to the fourth end 54. The holder protrusion 52B includes extending portions 521B and 522B. The extending portion 521B is a plate-like portion that protrudes leftward with respect to the second end surface 52A (see FIG. 21). The length in the left-right direction of the extending portion 521B is the length in the left-right direction between the upper end of the left end 24C of the fourth extending portion 24A and the right end of the rear first regulating member 221B (hereinafter referred to as “the groove portion 221C. It is also referred to as “the length in the left-right direction” (see FIG. 13). The extending portion 522B is a plate-like portion that extends forward from the left end of the extending portion 521B. A holder protrusion 53 </ b> B is provided on the lower surface of the portion connected to the fourth end 54 in the third end 53. The holder protrusion 53B includes extending portions 531B and 532B. The extending portion 531B is a plate-like portion that protrudes leftward with respect to the third end surface 53A. The length in the left-right direction of the extending portion 531B is the length in the left-right direction between the lower end of the left end 24C of the fourth extending portion 24A and the right end of the rear first restriction member 231B (hereinafter referred to as “the groove portion 231C. It is also referred to as “the length in the horizontal direction”. The extending portion 532B is a plate-like portion extending forward from the left end of the extending portion 531B.
 図21に示すように、第4端部54の第4端面54Aに、第1ホルダ係合部541A、及び、第2ホルダ係合部542A、542Bが設けられる。第1ホルダ係合部541Aは、第4端面54Aの上下方向中心、且つ前後方向中心よりも前側から、右方に突出する。第2ホルダ係合部542Aは、第4端面54Aの上下方向中心よりも上側、且つ、前後方向中心よりも後側から、右方に突出する。第2ホルダ係合部542Bは、第4端面54Aの上下方向中心よりも下側、且つ、前後方向中心よりも後側から、右方に突出する。 As shown in FIG. 21, a first holder engaging portion 541A and second holder engaging portions 542A and 542B are provided on the fourth end face 54A of the fourth end portion 54. The first holder engaging portion 541A protrudes to the right from the center of the fourth end surface 54A in the up-down direction and from the front side of the front-rear direction center. The second holder engaging portion 542A protrudes to the right from the upper side in the vertical direction of the fourth end face 54A and from the rear side in the front-rear direction. The second holder engagement portion 542B protrudes to the right from the lower side of the fourth end surface 54A and the rear side of the front and rear direction center.
 偏向ユニット59は、筐体12に着脱可能に支持される。図22は、偏向ユニット59が筐体12に装着される前の状態を示す。偏向ユニット59は、第2筐体1022の第2延出部22A、及び、第3筐体1023の第3延出部1023Aによって上下方向を覆われた領域に対して、ホルダ5が後側から前側に移動することによって、筐体12に装着される。偏向ユニット59が筐体12に装着される過程で、ホルダ5のホルダ突出部52Bは、第2延出部22Aの溝部221Cに後側から入り込み、ホルダ5のホルダ突出部53Bは、第3延出部1023Aの溝部231Cに後側から入り込む(図13参照)。ホルダ5の第2端部52は、筐体12の第2延出部22Aの第2裏面22Bの下側を、第2裏面22Bに沿って平行に移動する。ホルダ5の第3端部53は、筐体12の第3延出部1023Aの第3裏面1023Bの上側を、第3裏面1023Bに沿って平行に移動する。 The deflection unit 59 is detachably supported on the housing 12. FIG. 22 shows a state before the deflection unit 59 is attached to the housing 12. The deflection unit 59 has the holder 5 from the rear side with respect to the region covered in the vertical direction by the second extending portion 22A of the second housing 1022 and the third extending portion 1023A of the third housing 1023. By moving to the front side, it is attached to the housing 12. In the process of mounting the deflection unit 59 on the housing 12, the holder protrusion 52B of the holder 5 enters the groove 221C of the second extension 22A from the rear side, and the holder protrusion 53B of the holder 5 extends to the third extension. It enters the groove portion 231C of the exit portion 1023A from the rear side (see FIG. 13). The second end portion 52 of the holder 5 moves in parallel below the second back surface 22B of the second extending portion 22A of the housing 12 along the second back surface 22B. The third end portion 53 of the holder 5 moves in parallel with the third back surface 1023B on the upper side of the third back surface 1023B of the third extending portion 1023A of the housing 12.
 偏向ユニット59が筐体12に装着される過程で、第1ホルダ係合部541A(図21参照)は、第4筐体24の左端24Cに設けられた筐体係合部241(図13参照)に対して後側から接触する。ホルダ5に対して前側に更に力が加えられた場合、第4端部54が左側に撓むことによって、第1ホルダ係合部541Aは、筐体係合部241の左側を乗り越えて、筐体係合部241の前側に移動する。 In the process in which the deflection unit 59 is mounted on the housing 12, the first holder engaging portion 541 A (see FIG. 21) is moved to the housing engaging portion 241 (see FIG. 13) provided at the left end 24 C of the fourth housing 24. ) From the rear side. When further force is applied to the front side with respect to the holder 5, the fourth end portion 54 bends to the left side, so that the first holder engaging portion 541 A gets over the left side of the housing engaging portion 241 and moves to the housing. It moves to the front side of the body engaging portion 241.
 図23は、偏向ユニット59が筐体12に装着された状態を示す。ホルダ5の第1端部51の前端は、第1筐体1021の第1延出部1021Aの第1裏面21B(図22参照)の左端21Cの近傍に、後側から接触する。これによって、ホルダ5の前方への移動は規制される。ホルダ5は、第2筐体1022の第2延出部22A、及び、第3筐体1023の第3延出部1023Aによって上下方向を覆われた領域に配置される。ホルダ5は、第1端面51A~第4端面54A(図21参照)に対して左側にハーフミラー56を保持する(図15参照)ので、ハーフミラー56は、第1端部51が接触する第1裏面21Bよりも左側に配置される。 FIG. 23 shows a state in which the deflection unit 59 is mounted on the housing 12. The front end of the first end portion 51 of the holder 5 comes into contact with the vicinity of the left end 21C of the first back surface 21B (see FIG. 22) of the first extension portion 1021A of the first housing 1021 from the rear side. Thereby, the forward movement of the holder 5 is restricted. The holder 5 is disposed in a region covered in the vertical direction by the second extending portion 22A of the second housing 1022 and the third extending portion 1023A of the third housing 1023. The holder 5 holds the half mirror 56 on the left side with respect to the first end face 51A to the fourth end face 54A (see FIG. 21) (see FIG. 15), so that the half mirror 56 is in contact with the first end 51. 1 Arranged on the left side of the back surface 21B.
 ホルダ5の第1端部51の第1端面51A(図21参照)のうち、上下方向中心を含む位置に、第2規制部材211(図22参照)の左側面が接触する。ホルダ5の第1端部51の左端面のうち上側の位置に、前側第1規制部材221A(図14参照)が接触する。ホルダ5の第1端部51の左端面のうち下側の位置に、前側第1規制部材231Aの右側面が接触する。 The left side surface of the second restricting member 211 (see FIG. 22) is in contact with the position including the center in the vertical direction in the first end surface 51A (see FIG. 21) of the first end portion 51 of the holder 5. The front first regulating member 221A (see FIG. 14) is in contact with the upper position of the left end surface of the first end portion 51 of the holder 5. The right side surface of the front first regulating member 231 </ b> A comes into contact with the lower position of the left end surface of the first end portion 51 of the holder 5.
 なお、前側第1規制部材221A、231Aのそれぞれの右端と、第2規制部材211の左端との間の長さは、ホルダ5の第1端部51の左右方向の長さ(厚さ)と等しい。従って、偏向ユニット59が筐体12に装着された状態で、前側第1規制部材221A、231Aのそれぞれの右端面と、第2規制部材211の左端面とは、ホルダ5の前側の左右方向の移動を規制する。 The length between the right end of each of the front first restriction members 221 </ b> A and 231 </ b> A and the left end of the second restriction member 211 is the length (thickness) in the left-right direction of the first end 51 of the holder 5. equal. Therefore, in a state where the deflection unit 59 is mounted on the housing 12, the right end surfaces of the first front regulating members 221 </ b> A and 231 </ b> A and the left end surface of the second regulating member 211 are in the left-right direction on the front side of the holder 5. Restrict movement.
 ホルダ突出部52B(図20参照)の延設部521Bは、溝部221Cに嵌る。延設部521Bの右端、即ち、第2端面52Aの後端部は、溝部221Cを構成する第4延出部24Aの左端24Cの上端部に接触する。延設部521Bの左端は、後側第1規制部材221Bの右端に接触する。ホルダ突出部53Bの延設部531Bは、溝部231Cに嵌る。延設部531Bの右端、即ち、第3端面53Aの後端部は、溝部231Cを構成する第4延出部24Aの左端24Cの下端部に接触する。延設部531Bの左端は、後側第1規制部材231Bの右端に接触する。 The extension part 521B of the holder protrusion part 52B (see FIG. 20) fits into the groove part 221C. The right end of the extending portion 521B, that is, the rear end portion of the second end surface 52A is in contact with the upper end portion of the left end 24C of the fourth extending portion 24A constituting the groove portion 221C. The left end of the extending portion 521B is in contact with the right end of the rear first restriction member 221B. The extending part 531B of the holder protruding part 53B fits into the groove part 231C. The right end of the extending portion 531B, that is, the rear end portion of the third end surface 53A is in contact with the lower end portion of the left end 24C of the fourth extending portion 24A constituting the groove portion 231C. The left end of the extending portion 531B is in contact with the right end of the rear first restriction member 231B.
 ホルダ5の第2端部52の上側の面は、筐体12の第2延出部22Aの第2裏面22B(図13参照)よりも下側に、第2端部52に対するホルダ突出部52Bの上方向の突出量分離隔して対向配置する。ホルダ5の第3端部53(図20参照)の下側の面は、筐体12の第3延出部1023Aの第3裏面1023B(図13参照)よりも上側に、第3端部53に対するホルダ突出部53Bの下方向の突出量分離隔して対向配置する。 The upper surface of the second end portion 52 of the holder 5 is located below the second back surface 22B (see FIG. 13) of the second extending portion 22A of the housing 12 and the holder protruding portion 52B with respect to the second end portion 52. The upper protrusions are spaced apart from each other. The lower surface of the third end portion 53 (see FIG. 20) of the holder 5 is located above the third back surface 1023B (see FIG. 13) of the third extension portion 1023A of the housing 12, and the third end portion 53. The holder projecting portion 53B is disposed so as to be opposed to each other while being separated by a downward projecting amount.
 なお、延設部521Bの左右方向の長さと溝部221Cの左右方向の長さは等しい。又、延設部531Bの左右方向の長さと溝部231Cの左右方向の長さは等しい。従って、偏向ユニット59が筐体12に装着された状態で、溝部221Cを構成する後側第1規制部材221Bの右端と第4延出部24Aの左端24Cの上端部とは、ホルダ5の後側の左右方向の移動を規制する。又、偏向ユニット59が筐体12に装着された状態で、溝部231Cを構成する後側第1規制部材231Bの右端と第4延出部24Aの左端24Cの下端部とは、ホルダ5の左右方向の移動を規制する。 In addition, the length in the left-right direction of the extending portion 521B is equal to the length in the left-right direction of the groove portion 221C. Further, the length of the extending portion 531B in the left-right direction is equal to the length of the groove portion 231C in the left-right direction. Therefore, the right end of the rear first regulating member 221B and the upper end of the left end 24C of the fourth extending portion 24A in the state where the deflection unit 59 is attached to the housing 12 are the rear of the holder 5. Side to side movement is restricted. When the deflection unit 59 is mounted on the housing 12, the right end of the rear first restriction member 231 </ b> B constituting the groove 231 </ b> C and the lower end of the left end 24 </ b> C of the fourth extension 24 </ b> A are Regulate direction movement.
 偏向ユニット59が筐体12に装着された状態で、筐体係合部241(図13参照)の前側面は、第1ホルダ係合部541A(図21参照)の後側面に接触する。筐体係合部241の後側面は、第2ホルダ係合部542A、542Bのそれぞれの前側面に接触する。このように、第1ホルダ係合部541A及び第2ホルダ係合部542A、542Bと、筐体係合部241とは係合する。従って、ホルダ5の前後方向の移動は、筐体係合部241によって規制され、偏向ユニット59が筐体12に装着された状態は維持される。 In the state where the deflection unit 59 is mounted on the housing 12, the front side surface of the housing engaging portion 241 (see FIG. 13) contacts the rear side surface of the first holder engaging portion 541A (see FIG. 21). The rear side surface of the housing engaging portion 241 contacts the front side surface of each of the second holder engaging portions 542A and 542B. Thus, the first holder engaging portion 541A and the second holder engaging portions 542A and 542B engage with the housing engaging portion 241. Therefore, the movement of the holder 5 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the housing engaging portion 241 and the state where the deflection unit 59 is attached to the housing 12 is maintained.
<動作概要(ピント調節)>
 HMD101の動作概要について説明する。初めに使用者は、HMD101の装着具8(図10参照)を頭部に着用する。使用者は、偏向ユニット59が筐体12に装着された状態の本体部材11を持ち、ハーフミラー56が左眼の前方に配置されるように位置を調節する。
<Overview of operation (focus adjustment)>
An outline of the operation of the HMD 101 will be described. First, the user wears the wearing tool 8 (see FIG. 10) of the HMD 101 on the head. The user has the main body member 11 with the deflection unit 59 mounted on the housing 12, and adjusts the position so that the half mirror 56 is disposed in front of the left eye.
 外部機器(図示略)から、画像データの出力が開始される。制御基板73B(図15参照)は、通信線28(図11参照)を介して画像データを受信する。制御基板73Bは、受信した画像データに応じた画像を、液晶パネル72Bに表示させる。液晶パネル72Bに表示された画像の画像光は、ガラス基板1072A及び円筒部材71Aを左側に通過し、画像ユニット7から左側に射出する。画像ユニット7から射出した画像光は、レンズユニット6の複数のレンズ63を左側に通過し、レンズユニット6から左側に射出する。ハーフミラー56は、レンズユニット6から射出された画像光を後側に反射させる。画像光は使用者の左眼に入射する。又、ハーフミラー56は、前側から入射した外界の光を後側に透過させる。これによって使用者は、HMD101の本体部材11に対して前側の景色に虚像を重ねて認識する。 Output of image data is started from an external device (not shown). The control board 73B (see FIG. 15) receives the image data via the communication line 28 (see FIG. 11). The control board 73B displays an image corresponding to the received image data on the liquid crystal panel 72B. The image light of the image displayed on the liquid crystal panel 72B passes through the glass substrate 1072A and the cylindrical member 71A to the left, and exits from the image unit 7 to the left. The image light emitted from the image unit 7 passes through the plurality of lenses 63 of the lens unit 6 to the left, and exits from the lens unit 6 to the left. The half mirror 56 reflects the image light emitted from the lens unit 6 to the rear side. The image light is incident on the left eye of the user. Further, the half mirror 56 transmits the external light incident from the front side to the rear side. As a result, the user recognizes the main body member 11 of the HMD 101 by superimposing a virtual image on the front scene.
 ピント調節を行なうために使用者が操作部材3を回転させた場合の、レンズユニット6の動きについて説明する。操作部材3の回動に応じて調節機構4が回動する場合、突出部64(図15参照)は、係合部4Bのカム溝42(図19参照)に沿って移動する。突出部64の移動に応じてレンズユニット6が移動するとき、溝部242は、突出部65(図17参照)の上下方向への移動を規制する。このためレンズユニット6は、調節機構4の回動に応じて左右方向に移動する。なお、以下における回転方向(時計回り又は反時計回り)の説明は、特段の限定がない限り、HMD101を前側から見た時の方向を示すものとする。 The movement of the lens unit 6 when the user rotates the operation member 3 to adjust the focus will be described. When the adjusting mechanism 4 rotates according to the rotation of the operation member 3, the protruding portion 64 (see FIG. 15) moves along the cam groove 42 (see FIG. 19) of the engaging portion 4B. When the lens unit 6 moves in accordance with the movement of the protrusion 64, the groove 242 restricts the movement of the protrusion 65 (see FIG. 17) in the vertical direction. For this reason, the lens unit 6 moves in the left-right direction in accordance with the rotation of the adjustment mechanism 4. In the following description, the direction of rotation (clockwise or counterclockwise) indicates the direction when the HMD 101 is viewed from the front side, unless otherwise specified.
 図24を参照し、操作部材3が時計回りに回動した場合を例に挙げて具体的に説明する。操作部材3の回動に応じて調節機構4が回転した場合、カム溝42(図19参照)を形成する前後方向に伸びる互いに平行な一対の壁面は、接触する突出部64に対して右側に力を作用させ、突出部64を右側に移動させる。突出部64の移動に伴い、レンズユニット6は右側に移動する。レンズユニット6の円筒部材62(図15参照)は、画像ユニット7の円筒部材71A内に入り込む。円筒部材62の突出部621C(図18参照)は、円筒部材71Aの溝部713Aに沿って右側に移動し、円筒部材62の突出部621D(図18参照)は、円筒部材71Aの溝部714A(図16参照)に沿って右側に移動する。カム溝42の第1端42A(図19参照)に突出部64が接触することによって、操作部材3の時計回りの回動は規制される。このとき、レンズユニット6の保持部材61の右端は、画像ユニット7の円筒部材71Aの左端に近接する。画像ユニット7の液晶パネル72B(図15参照)と、レンズユニット6の複数のレンズ63とは最も近接する。以下、レンズユニット6と画像ユニット7とが最も近接した図15の状態を、第1状態という。 Referring to FIG. 24, the case where the operation member 3 rotates clockwise will be specifically described as an example. When the adjusting mechanism 4 rotates in response to the rotation of the operation member 3, the pair of parallel wall surfaces extending in the front-rear direction forming the cam groove 42 (see FIG. 19) are on the right side with respect to the projecting portion 64 in contact. A force is applied to move the protrusion 64 to the right. As the protruding portion 64 moves, the lens unit 6 moves to the right side. The cylindrical member 62 (see FIG. 15) of the lens unit 6 enters the cylindrical member 71A of the image unit 7. The protruding portion 621C (see FIG. 18) of the cylindrical member 62 moves to the right along the groove portion 713A of the cylindrical member 71A, and the protruding portion 621D (see FIG. 18) of the cylindrical member 62 is the groove portion 714A (see FIG. 18) of the cylindrical member 71A. 16) to the right. When the protrusion 64 contacts the first end 42A (see FIG. 19) of the cam groove 42, the clockwise rotation of the operation member 3 is restricted. At this time, the right end of the holding member 61 of the lens unit 6 is close to the left end of the cylindrical member 71 </ b> A of the image unit 7. The liquid crystal panel 72B (see FIG. 15) of the image unit 7 and the plurality of lenses 63 of the lens unit 6 are closest to each other. Hereinafter, the state of FIG. 15 in which the lens unit 6 and the image unit 7 are closest to each other is referred to as a first state.
 図25を参照し、操作部材3が反時計回りに回動した場合を例に挙げて具体的に説明する。操作部材3の回動に応じて調節機構4が回転した場合、カム溝42(図19参照)を形成する前後方向に伸びる互いに平行な一対の壁面は、接触する突出部64に対して左側に力を作用させ、突出部64を左側に移動させる。突出部64の移動に伴い、レンズユニット6は左側に移動する。レンズユニット6の円筒部材62は、画像ユニット7の円筒部材71A内から左方外側に移動する。円筒部材62の突出部621Cは、円筒部材71Aの溝部713Aに沿って左側に移動し、円筒部材62の突出部621Dは、円筒部材71Aの溝部714A(図16参照)に沿って左側に移動する。カム溝42の第2端42Bに突出部64が接触することによって、操作部材3の反時計回りの回動は規制される。このとき、レンズユニット6の保持部材61の右端は、画像ユニット7の円筒部材71Aの左端に対して左側に離隔する。画像ユニット7の液晶パネル72B(図15参照)と、レンズユニット6の複数のレンズ63とは最も離隔する。以下、レンズユニット6と画像ユニット7とが最も離隔した図16の状態を、第2状態という。 Referring to FIG. 25, the case where the operation member 3 is rotated counterclockwise will be specifically described as an example. When the adjusting mechanism 4 rotates according to the rotation of the operation member 3, the pair of parallel wall surfaces extending in the front-rear direction forming the cam groove 42 (see FIG. 19) are on the left side with respect to the projecting portion 64 that comes into contact. A force is applied to move the protrusion 64 to the left. As the protrusion 64 moves, the lens unit 6 moves to the left. The cylindrical member 62 of the lens unit 6 moves to the left outside from the cylindrical member 71A of the image unit 7. The protruding portion 621C of the cylindrical member 62 moves to the left along the groove 713A of the cylindrical member 71A, and the protruding portion 621D of the cylindrical member 62 moves to the left along the groove 714A (see FIG. 16) of the cylindrical member 71A. . When the protrusion 64 comes into contact with the second end 42B of the cam groove 42, the counterclockwise rotation of the operation member 3 is restricted. At this time, the right end of the holding member 61 of the lens unit 6 is separated to the left side with respect to the left end of the cylindrical member 71 </ b> A of the image unit 7. The liquid crystal panel 72B (see FIG. 15) of the image unit 7 and the plurality of lenses 63 of the lens unit 6 are farthest away. Hereinafter, the state of FIG. 16 in which the lens unit 6 and the image unit 7 are most separated is referred to as a second state.
 なお、レンズユニット6が左右方向に移動したとき、複数のレンズ63によって、ユーザによって視認される虚像となる画像光の広がり角が変化する。従って使用者は、操作部材3を回動させることによってピント調節を行うことができる。なお、図19に示すように、方向48と方向1049とのなす角度φは120度であるので、操作部材3の回動可能な角度も120度になる。 When the lens unit 6 moves in the left-right direction, the spread angle of the image light that becomes a virtual image visually recognized by the user is changed by the plurality of lenses 63. Therefore, the user can adjust the focus by rotating the operation member 3. As shown in FIG. 19, since the angle φ formed by the direction 48 and the direction 1049 is 120 degrees, the angle at which the operation member 3 can be rotated is also 120 degrees.
 操作部材3及び調節機構4の回動に応じてレンズユニット6が左右方向に移動するとき、円筒部材62と円筒部材71Aとのそれぞれの左右方向の少なくとも一部は、常に重なる。このため、画像ユニット7によって生成された画像光は、レンズユニット6が左右方向に移動しても、画像ユニット7及びレンズユニット6から外部に漏れ出ない。 When the lens unit 6 moves in the left-right direction according to the rotation of the operation member 3 and the adjusting mechanism 4, at least a part of each of the cylindrical member 62 and the cylindrical member 71A always overlaps. For this reason, the image light generated by the image unit 7 does not leak out from the image unit 7 and the lens unit 6 even when the lens unit 6 moves in the left-right direction.
 調節機構4が回動する過程で、複数の凹部1041のうち1つに板バネ40(図15参照)が係合した状態から、複数の凹部1041のうち隣接する他に板バネ40が係合した状態に変化する。調節機構4の回動は、凹部1041に板バネ40が係合した状態で抑制され、調節機構4の位置は安定化する。このため使用者は、操作部材3及び調節機構4を所望する位置に容易に保持させることができるので、ピント調節を容易に行うことができる。 In the process in which the adjusting mechanism 4 is rotated, the leaf spring 40 is engaged with one of the plurality of recesses 1041 from the state in which the leaf spring 40 (see FIG. 15) is engaged with one of the plurality of recesses 1041. It changes to the state. The rotation of the adjustment mechanism 4 is suppressed in a state where the leaf spring 40 is engaged with the recess 1041, and the position of the adjustment mechanism 4 is stabilized. For this reason, the user can easily hold the operation member 3 and the adjustment mechanism 4 at desired positions, so that the focus adjustment can be easily performed.
<効果>
 以上説明したように、HMD101において、レンズユニット6の湾曲部61Aに突出部64が設けられ、湾曲部61Bに突出部65が設けられる。突出部65は、筐体12の第4筐体24に設けられた溝部242に嵌り、筐体12に対して左右方向に移動可能に支持される。突出部64は、操作部材3の後端部に設けられた調節機構4の係合部4Bのカム溝42に嵌る。操作部材3を回転させる操作が行われた場合、レンズユニット6は左右方向に移動する。これによって、レンズユニット6と画像ユニット7との光軸に沿った方向の相対距離が変化し、ピント調節が行われる。
<Effect>
As described above, in the HMD 101, the protruding portion 64 is provided in the curved portion 61A of the lens unit 6, and the protruding portion 65 is provided in the curved portion 61B. The protrusion 65 fits into a groove 242 provided in the fourth housing 24 of the housing 12 and is supported so as to be movable in the left-right direction with respect to the housing 12. The protruding portion 64 fits in the cam groove 42 of the engaging portion 4B of the adjusting mechanism 4 provided at the rear end portion of the operation member 3. When an operation for rotating the operation member 3 is performed, the lens unit 6 moves in the left-right direction. As a result, the relative distance between the lens unit 6 and the image unit 7 in the direction along the optical axis changes, and focus adjustment is performed.
 HMD101が使用者に装着された状態で、突出部64、65、溝部242、及び、カム溝42は、使用者に対して前後方向に配置され、上下方向に配置されない。このため、HMD101は、使用者に装着された状態で上下方向の大きさを抑制できる。従って、使用者の視野が筐体12によって遮られる可能性は低減される。従って、HMD101は、使用者に装着された状態で使用者の視野を良好に維持できる。 In a state where the HMD 101 is mounted on the user, the projecting portions 64 and 65, the groove portion 242 and the cam groove 42 are arranged in the front-rear direction with respect to the user, and are not arranged in the vertical direction. For this reason, HMD101 can suppress the magnitude | size of an up-down direction in the state with which the user was mounted | worn. Therefore, the possibility that the user's field of view is blocked by the housing 12 is reduced. Therefore, the HMD 101 can maintain the user's visual field well while being worn by the user.
 HMD101の筐体12は、画像ユニット7とハーフミラー56とを保持し、双方間の距離を固定する。HMD101では、操作部材3に対する操作に応じて、レンズユニット6を左右方向に移動させ、レンズユニット6と画像ユニット7との間の距離を変化させることによって、ピント調節が行われる。なお、レンズユニット6は、外部からの電気的制御が不要であるので、電気信号を伝達するための信号線が接続されない。このため、レンズユニット6の左右方向への移動は、信号線によって妨げられない。従って、HMD101は、レンズユニット6を左右方向にスムーズに移動させることができる。 The housing 12 of the HMD 101 holds the image unit 7 and the half mirror 56, and fixes the distance between them. In the HMD 101, the focus adjustment is performed by moving the lens unit 6 in the left-right direction and changing the distance between the lens unit 6 and the image unit 7 in accordance with an operation on the operation member 3. Since the lens unit 6 does not require external electrical control, a signal line for transmitting an electrical signal is not connected. For this reason, the movement of the lens unit 6 in the left-right direction is not hindered by the signal line. Therefore, the HMD 101 can smoothly move the lens unit 6 in the left-right direction.
 HMD101において、突出部65は湾曲部61Bから後方に突出する。突出部65が嵌る溝部242は、第4筐体24の内側面に設けられる。このため、HMD101は、突出部65及び溝部242によって筐体12が上下方向に大きくなることを適切に抑制できる。従って、使用者の視野が筐体12によって遮られる可能性を低減できる。又、溝部242は左右方向に一直線状に延びるので、突出部65が左右方向以外の方向に移動することを規制できる。従って、HMD101は、画像ユニット7又はレンズユニット6を左右方向に適切に移動させることができる。又、突出部65の形状は棒状であり、左右方向に長い。このためHMD101は、操作部材3に対する操作が行われた場合に、レンズユニット6が前後方向に延びる軸を支点として回転することを抑制できる。従って、HMD101は、レンズユニット6を左右方向に移動させることによるピント調節を適切に実行できる。 In the HMD 101, the protruding portion 65 protrudes backward from the curved portion 61B. The groove portion 242 into which the protruding portion 65 is fitted is provided on the inner side surface of the fourth housing 24. For this reason, HMD101 can suppress appropriately that the housing | casing 12 becomes large by the protrusion part 65 and the groove part 242 to an up-down direction. Therefore, the possibility that the user's field of view is blocked by the housing 12 can be reduced. Moreover, since the groove part 242 extends in a straight line in the left-right direction, the movement of the protruding part 65 in a direction other than the left-right direction can be restricted. Therefore, the HMD 101 can appropriately move the image unit 7 or the lens unit 6 in the left-right direction. Moreover, the shape of the protrusion part 65 is a rod shape, and long in the left-right direction. For this reason, when operation with respect to the operation member 3 is performed, HMD101 can suppress that the lens unit 6 rotates using the axis | shaft extended in the front-back direction as a fulcrum. Accordingly, the HMD 101 can appropriately perform focus adjustment by moving the lens unit 6 in the left-right direction.
 HMD101が第2筐体1022を上にした状態で使用者に装着された場合と、第3筐体1023を上にした状態で使用者に装着された状態とで、レンズユニット6に加わる重力の向きは変化する。ここで、HMD101において、突出部64は、レンズユニット6の湾曲部61Aの上下方向中心を含む位置に設けられる。突出部65は、レンズユニット6の湾曲部61Bの上下方向中心を含む位置に設けられる。溝部242は、筐体12の第4筐体24の内側面の上下方向中心に設けられる。従って、HMD101は、レンズユニット6に加わる重力の向きが変化した場合でも、レンズユニット6を水平に維持できる。 Gravity applied to the lens unit 6 when the HMD 101 is attached to the user with the second housing 1022 up and when the HMD 101 is attached to the user with the third housing 1023 up. The direction changes. Here, in the HMD 101, the protruding portion 64 is provided at a position including the vertical center of the curved portion 61 </ b> A of the lens unit 6. The protruding portion 65 is provided at a position including the center in the vertical direction of the curved portion 61B of the lens unit 6. The groove portion 242 is provided at the center in the vertical direction of the inner surface of the fourth housing 24 of the housing 12. Therefore, the HMD 101 can keep the lens unit 6 horizontal even when the direction of gravity applied to the lens unit 6 changes.
 HMD101において、突出部64は湾曲部61Aから前方に突出する。突出部64が嵌るカム溝42を有する調節機構4の係合部4Bは、筐体12の第1筐体1021の後側の面に設けられる。このため、突出部64及び調節機構4の係合部4Bによって筐体12が上下方向に大きくなることを適切に抑制できる。従って、使用者の視野が筐体によって遮られる可能性を低減できる。又、突出部64は、係合部4Bのカム溝42に嵌り、操作部材3の回転に応じて左右方向に移動する。これによって、レンズユニット6を左右方向に移動させることができるので、HMD101は、画像ユニット7及びレンズユニット6の間の距離を変化させてピント調節を行うことができる。 In the HMD 101, the protruding portion 64 protrudes forward from the curved portion 61A. The engaging portion 4B of the adjustment mechanism 4 having the cam groove 42 into which the protruding portion 64 is fitted is provided on the rear surface of the first housing 1021 of the housing 12. For this reason, it can suppress appropriately that the housing | casing 12 becomes large by the protrusion part 64 and the engaging part 4B of the adjustment mechanism 4 to an up-down direction. Therefore, the possibility that the user's field of view is blocked by the housing can be reduced. Further, the protruding portion 64 fits in the cam groove 42 of the engaging portion 4B and moves in the left-right direction according to the rotation of the operation member 3. Accordingly, since the lens unit 6 can be moved in the left-right direction, the HMD 101 can adjust the focus by changing the distance between the image unit 7 and the lens unit 6.
 HMD101において、画像ユニット7とレンズユニット6との左右方向の重複部分で、円筒部材62の突出部621C、621Dが、円筒部材71Aの溝部713A、714Aに嵌る。これによって、画像ユニット7とレンズユニット6との左右方向と直交する方向(前後方向及び上下方向)の位置関係が固定される。従って、操作部材3に対する操作に応じてレンズユニット6が左右方向に移動したときに、レンズユニット6及び画像ユニット7の少なくとも一方が光軸77と交差する方向に移動することを抑制できる。なお、突出部621C、621D及び溝部713A、714Aは、それぞれ、光軸77にもっとも近接する位置に設けられる。このため、HMD101は、レンズユニット6及び画像ユニット7が光軸77と交差する方向に移動することを適切に抑制できる。 In the HMD 101, the protruding portions 621C and 621D of the cylindrical member 62 fit into the groove portions 713A and 714A of the cylindrical member 71A at the overlapping portion in the left-right direction between the image unit 7 and the lens unit 6. As a result, the positional relationship between the image unit 7 and the lens unit 6 in the direction (front-rear direction and vertical direction) orthogonal to the left-right direction is fixed. Therefore, when the lens unit 6 moves in the left-right direction in response to an operation on the operation member 3, it is possible to suppress movement of at least one of the lens unit 6 and the image unit 7 in a direction intersecting the optical axis 77. Note that the protruding portions 621C and 621D and the groove portions 713A and 714A are provided at positions closest to the optical axis 77, respectively. For this reason, the HMD 101 can appropriately suppress the movement of the lens unit 6 and the image unit 7 in the direction intersecting the optical axis 77.
 又、突出部621C、621Dは、レンズユニット6の円筒部材62のうち上下方向に配置される平面部62C、62Dに設けられる。又、溝部713A、714Aは、画像ユニット7の円筒部材71Aのうち上下方向に配置される平面部713、714に設けられる。このため、画像ユニット7とレンズユニット6とは、それぞれの左右方向の重複部分の上下方向両側で、光軸77と交差する方向の位置関係が固定される。従って、操作部材3に対する操作に応じてレンズユニット6が左右方向に移動したときに、レンズユニット6及び画像ユニット7が光軸77と交差する方向に移動することを適切に抑制できる。 Further, the projecting portions 621C and 621D are provided on the planar portions 62C and 62D arranged in the vertical direction of the cylindrical member 62 of the lens unit 6. Further, the groove portions 713A and 714A are provided in the flat surface portions 713 and 714 arranged in the vertical direction of the cylindrical member 71A of the image unit 7. For this reason, the positional relationship between the image unit 7 and the lens unit 6 in the direction intersecting the optical axis 77 is fixed on both sides in the vertical direction of the overlapping portions in the horizontal direction. Therefore, when the lens unit 6 moves in the left-right direction according to the operation on the operation member 3, it is possible to appropriately suppress the lens unit 6 and the image unit 7 from moving in the direction intersecting the optical axis 77.
 更に、突出部621Cは平面部62Cの前後方向中心に設けられ、突出部621Dは平面部62Dの前後方向中心に設けられる。又、溝部713Aは、平面部713の前後方向中心に設けられ、溝部714Aは、平面部714の前後方向中心に設けられる。この場合、操作部材3に対する操作に応じてレンズユニット6が左右方向に移動したときに、レンズユニット6及び画像ユニット7が前後方向に移動することを適切に抑制できる。 Further, the protrusion 621C is provided at the center in the front-rear direction of the flat part 62C, and the protrusion 621D is provided at the center in the front-rear direction of the flat part 62D. The groove portion 713A is provided at the center in the front-rear direction of the plane portion 713, and the groove portion 714A is provided at the center in the front-rear direction of the plane portion 714. In this case, when the lens unit 6 moves in the left-right direction in accordance with an operation on the operation member 3, it is possible to appropriately suppress the lens unit 6 and the image unit 7 from moving in the front-rear direction.
 HMD101において、使用者側に近接して配置される後側筐体14に、レンズユニット6及び画像ユニット7が保持される。使用者側から離隔して配置される前側筐体13に、操作部材3及び調節機構4が保持される。なお、HMD101は、装着具8が使用者の頭部に着用され、接続具9が後側筐体14に接続して筐体12全体を支持することによって、使用者に装着される。従って、接続具9に直接接続された後側筐体14にレンズユニット6及び画像ユニット7が保持されることになるので、レンズユニット6及び画像ユニット7を使用者の頭部に適切に固定できる。 In the HMD 101, the lens unit 6 and the image unit 7 are held in the rear housing 14 that is arranged close to the user side. The operation member 3 and the adjustment mechanism 4 are held in the front housing 13 that is disposed apart from the user side. The HMD 101 is worn by the user when the wearing tool 8 is worn on the user's head and the connecting tool 9 is connected to the rear housing 14 to support the entire housing 12. Therefore, since the lens unit 6 and the image unit 7 are held by the rear casing 14 directly connected to the connection tool 9, the lens unit 6 and the image unit 7 can be appropriately fixed to the user's head. .
 画像ユニット7は、突出部712(712A~712C)を有する。突出部712の夫々の前側の端部は、同一平面上に配置される。この場合、突出部712を土台として画像ユニット7を台等に容易に載置させ易くなる。このため、画像ユニット7を筐体12に組み付けてHMD101を製造する場合に、画像ユニット7を安定化させることができる。これによって、HMD101の製造を容易化できる。 The image unit 7 has a protrusion 712 (712A to 712C). The front ends of the protrusions 712 are arranged on the same plane. In this case, it becomes easy to easily place the image unit 7 on a stand or the like using the protruding portion 712 as a base. For this reason, when the image unit 7 is assembled to the housing 12 and the HMD 101 is manufactured, the image unit 7 can be stabilized. Thereby, manufacture of HMD101 can be facilitated.
 HMD101の装着具8は、左右方向に延び且つ前方に向けて凸状に湾曲する第1部分8A、及び、第1部分8Aの両側から後側に延びる第2部分8B、8Cを有する。又、HMD101は、装着具8の第1部分8Aから延びる接続具9を有する。接続具9の先端に本体部材11が接続される。従って、装着具8が使用者の頭部に着用された状態で、使用者の眼前にハーフミラー56を保持できる。従って使用者は、ハーフミラー56によって偏向された画像光を視認しつつ、両手を使用して作業を行うことができる。 The mounting tool 8 of the HMD 101 has a first portion 8A that extends in the left-right direction and is curved in a convex shape toward the front, and second portions 8B and 8C that extend rearward from both sides of the first portion 8A. Further, the HMD 101 has a connection tool 9 extending from the first portion 8A of the mounting tool 8. The main body member 11 is connected to the tip of the connection tool 9. Therefore, the half mirror 56 can be held in front of the user's eyes with the wearing tool 8 worn on the user's head. Therefore, the user can work using both hands while visually recognizing the image light deflected by the half mirror 56.
 なお、HMD101において、画像ユニット7を左右方向に移動させることによってピント調節が行われてもよい。具体的には次の通りである。レンズユニット6が筐体12に固定的に保持され、画像ユニット7が左右方向に移動可能に保持されてもよい。画像ユニット7の前側及び後側の面のそれぞれに、突出部が設けられていてもよい。調節機構4のカム溝42に、画像ユニット7の前側の突出部が後方から嵌っていてもよい。第4筐体24の前側の面の溝部242に、画像ユニット7の後側の突出部が前方から嵌ってもよい。操作部材3及び調節機構4が回動した場合、画像ユニット7が左右方向に移動してもよい。又、画像ユニット7及びレンズユニット6の両方の前側及び後側の面に、突出部が設けられてもよい。画像ユニット7及びレンズユニット6を左右方向に移動させることによって、ピント調節が行われてもよい。筐体12は、レンズユニット6及び画像ユニット7のうち一部のみを覆っていてもよい。 In the HMD 101, focus adjustment may be performed by moving the image unit 7 in the left-right direction. Specifically, it is as follows. The lens unit 6 may be fixedly held on the housing 12 and the image unit 7 may be held movably in the left-right direction. Projections may be provided on each of the front and rear surfaces of the image unit 7. A protrusion on the front side of the image unit 7 may be fitted into the cam groove 42 of the adjustment mechanism 4 from the rear. The protruding portion on the rear side of the image unit 7 may be fitted from the front into the groove portion 242 on the front surface of the fourth housing 24. When the operation member 3 and the adjustment mechanism 4 rotate, the image unit 7 may move in the left-right direction. In addition, protrusions may be provided on the front and rear surfaces of both the image unit 7 and the lens unit 6. Focus adjustment may be performed by moving the image unit 7 and the lens unit 6 in the left-right direction. The housing 12 may cover only a part of the lens unit 6 and the image unit 7.
 レンズユニット6の突出部65は、円柱形であってもよい。突出部65が設けられる位置は、レンズユニット6の湾曲部61Bの上下方向中心を含む位置に限られず、中心よりも上側又は下側でもよい。レンズユニット6の突出部65の代わりに、左右方向に延び且つ前方に凹んだ溝部が設けられてもよい。第4筐体24の溝部242の代わりに、前方に突出する突出部が設けられてもよい。そして、レンズユニット6の溝部に、第4筐体24の突出部が嵌り、突出部が溝部に沿って左右方向に移動することによって、レンズユニット6を左右方向に移動可能としてもよい。 The protrusion 65 of the lens unit 6 may be cylindrical. The position where the protruding portion 65 is provided is not limited to the position including the center in the vertical direction of the curved portion 61B of the lens unit 6, and may be above or below the center. Instead of the protruding portion 65 of the lens unit 6, a groove portion extending in the left-right direction and recessed forward may be provided. Instead of the groove portion 242 of the fourth housing 24, a protruding portion that protrudes forward may be provided. Then, the lens unit 6 may be movable in the left-right direction by fitting the protrusion of the fourth housing 24 into the groove of the lens unit 6 and moving the protrusion in the left-right direction along the groove.
 レンズユニット6の突出部64の代わりに、左右方向に延びるラックギヤが設けられてもよい。調節機構4のカム溝42の代わりに、ラックギヤに嵌合するピニオンギヤが設けられてもよい。操作部材3の回転に応じてピニオンギヤが回転し、ピニオンギヤに嵌合するラックギヤが左右方向に移動することによって、ピント調節が行われてもよい。 Instead of the projecting portion 64 of the lens unit 6, a rack gear extending in the left-right direction may be provided. Instead of the cam groove 42 of the adjustment mechanism 4, a pinion gear that fits into the rack gear may be provided. The pinion gear may be rotated according to the rotation of the operation member 3, and the focus adjustment may be performed by moving the rack gear fitted to the pinion gear in the left-right direction.
 操作部材3及び調節機構4は一体の構造を有していてもよい。レンズユニット6の突出部64は、筐体12の第1筐体1021に設けられたスリットを介して、第1筐体1021の前側に突出してもよい。操作部材3の後端面3Bに、カム溝42が設けられてもよい。第1筐体1021の前側に突出する突出部64は、操作部材3のカム溝42に嵌っていてもよい。操作部材3の回転に応じ、突出部64がスリットに沿って左右方向に移動することによって、レンズユニット6が左右方向に移動してもよい。 The operation member 3 and the adjustment mechanism 4 may have an integral structure. The protruding portion 64 of the lens unit 6 may protrude to the front side of the first housing 1021 through a slit provided in the first housing 1021 of the housing 12. A cam groove 42 may be provided on the rear end surface 3 </ b> B of the operation member 3. The protruding portion 64 protruding to the front side of the first housing 1021 may be fitted in the cam groove 42 of the operation member 3. The lens unit 6 may move in the left-right direction by the protrusion 64 moving in the left-right direction along the slit according to the rotation of the operation member 3.
 上記のHMD101において、画像ユニット7には、平面部713、714のそれぞれのうち、前後方向中心よりも前側又は後側に、溝部713A、714Aが設けられてもよい。レンズユニット6には、平面部62C、62Dのそれぞれに、画像ユニット7の溝部713A、714Aに嵌る突出部621C、621Dが設けられてもよい。画像ユニット7には、平面部713、714のうち何れかに溝部が設けられてもよい。レンズユニット6には、平面部62C、62Dのうち何れかに、画像ユニット7の溝部に嵌る突出部が設けられてもよい。画像ユニット7には、平面部713、714のそれぞれに、2以上の溝部が設けられてもよい。レンズユニット6には、平面部62C、62Dのそれぞれに、画像ユニット7の2以上の溝部に嵌る2以上の突出部が設けられてもよい。画像ユニット7には、湾曲部715に溝部が設けられてもよい。レンズユニット6には、湾曲部62Aに、画像ユニット7の溝部に嵌る突出部が設けられてもよい。画像ユニット7の平面部713、714に設けられた溝部713Aの上端、及び、溝部714Aの下端は、開放してもよい。即ち、溝部713A、714Aはスリット状であってもよい。画像ユニット7の平面部713、714に突出部が設けられてもよい。レンズユニット6の平面部62C、62Dに、画像ユニット7の平面部713、714の突出部に嵌る溝部が設けられてもよい。画像ユニット7は、前側筐体13に保持されてもよい。画像ユニット7の側板部材71Bには、突出部712の代わりに、前方に突出する円柱又は角柱が設けられてもよい。 In the HMD 101 described above, the image unit 7 may be provided with groove portions 713A and 714A on the front side or the rear side of the plane portion 713 and 714 with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. The lens unit 6 may be provided with protrusions 621C and 621D that fit into the grooves 713A and 714A of the image unit 7 on the flat surfaces 62C and 62D, respectively. The image unit 7 may be provided with a groove portion in any one of the plane portions 713 and 714. The lens unit 6 may be provided with a protruding portion that fits into the groove portion of the image unit 7 in any one of the plane portions 62C and 62D. In the image unit 7, two or more groove portions may be provided in each of the plane portions 713 and 714. The lens unit 6 may be provided with two or more projecting portions that fit into two or more groove portions of the image unit 7 in each of the planar portions 62C and 62D. The image unit 7 may be provided with a groove in the curved portion 715. The lens unit 6 may be provided with a protrusion that fits in the groove of the image unit 7 in the curved portion 62A. You may open | release the upper end of the groove part 713A provided in the plane parts 713 and 714 of the image unit 7, and the lower end of the groove part 714A. That is, the groove portions 713A and 714A may have a slit shape. Projections may be provided on the plane portions 713 and 714 of the image unit 7. Groove portions that fit into the protruding portions of the flat portions 713 and 714 of the image unit 7 may be provided in the flat portions 62C and 62D of the lens unit 6. The image unit 7 may be held by the front housing 13. The side plate member 71 </ b> B of the image unit 7 may be provided with a column or prism that protrudes forward instead of the protruding portion 712.
 上記において、HMD101は装着具8及び接続具9を備えず、本体部材11のみの構成であってもよい。本体部材11は、眼鏡等に直接固定されてもよい。また、HMD101は、装着具8を備えず、接続具9及び本体部材11で構成されてもよい。 In the above description, the HMD 101 may be configured only with the main body member 11 without including the mounting tool 8 and the connection tool 9. The body member 11 may be directly fixed to glasses or the like. Further, the HMD 101 may be configured by the connection tool 9 and the main body member 11 without including the mounting tool 8.
 図27を参照し、本開示の変形例におけるHMD101の本体部材11Aについて説明する。本体部材11Aは、操作部材3が操作部材1030に変更されているという点で本体部材11(図11等参照)と異なり、他の部分は同一である。以下では、操作部材1030についてのみ説明し、他の部分の説明は省略する。 With reference to FIG. 27, the main body member 11A of the HMD 101 in the modification of the present disclosure will be described. The main body member 11A is different from the main body member 11 (see FIG. 11 and the like) in that the operation member 3 is changed to the operation member 1030, and the other parts are the same. Hereinafter, only the operation member 1030 will be described, and description of other parts will be omitted.
 本体部材11Aにおいて、操作部材1030は、第1部材36及び第2部材1037を有する。第1部材36は、第1筐体1021の第1表面21Mの凹部21Eから、前方に突出する。第1部材36は円柱状である。第1部材36の中心軸は前後方向に平行となる。第2部材1037は、第1部材36の前端面36Aに設けられる。第2部材1037は、断面が長方形を有する棒状である。第2部材1037は、前後方向と直交する方向(図27の場合、上下方向)に延びる。第2部材1037の長さは、第1部材36の前端面36Aの直径よりも大きい。第2部材1037の一方側の端部1037A及び他方側の端部1037Bは、第1部材36の側面よりも外側に突出する。 In the main body member 11 </ b> A, the operation member 1030 includes a first member 36 and a second member 1037. The first member 36 projects forward from the recess 21E of the first surface 21M of the first housing 1021. The first member 36 is cylindrical. The central axis of the first member 36 is parallel to the front-rear direction. The second member 1037 is provided on the front end surface 36 </ b> A of the first member 36. The second member 1037 has a rod shape with a rectangular cross section. The second member 1037 extends in a direction (vertical direction in FIG. 27) orthogonal to the front-rear direction. The length of the second member 1037 is larger than the diameter of the front end face 36 </ b> A of the first member 36. One end portion 1037 </ b> A and the other end portion 1037 </ b> B of the second member 1037 protrude outward from the side surface of the first member 36.
 第1部材36の後端面に、調節機構4の突出部4A(図15参照)が嵌合する嵌合溝(図示略)が設けられている。突出部4Aが嵌合溝に嵌合した状態で、操作部材1030及び調節機構4は第1筐体1021に保持される。操作部材1030及び調節機構4は、操作部材1030の中心軸を支点として一体となって回動可能である。 A fitting groove (not shown) into which the protruding portion 4A (see FIG. 15) of the adjusting mechanism 4 is fitted is provided on the rear end surface of the first member 36. The operation member 1030 and the adjustment mechanism 4 are held by the first housing 1021 in a state where the protrusion 4A is fitted in the fitting groove. The operation member 1030 and the adjustment mechanism 4 can rotate together with the central axis of the operation member 1030 as a fulcrum.
 以上の場合、使用者が装着具8を着用し、左眼(向かって右側の眼)の前にハーフミラー56を配置させたときに、使用者は、操作部材1030の第2部材1037の端部1037Aに中指86で力を加えることが容易に可能となる。従って使用者は、操作部材1030を容易に回動させることができる。 In the above case, when the user wears the wearing tool 8 and arranges the half mirror 56 in front of the left eye (right-side eye), the user can end the second member 1037 of the operation member 1030. It is possible to easily apply force to the portion 1037A with the middle finger 86. Therefore, the user can easily rotate the operation member 1030.
 使用者が右眼(向かって左側の眼)の前にハーフミラー56を配置させた状態を例に挙げる。この場合、使用者は、本体部材11によって使用者の左眼の視界が遮られないように、第2筐体1022の第2表面22Mを下側に配置させ、第3筐体1023の第3表面23Mを上側に配置させた状態(即ち、図10に対して上下方向を反転させた状態)で本体部材11を使用する。第2部材1037の端部1037Aは、第1部材36に対して下側に突出し、端部1037Bは、第1部材36に対して上側に突出する。この場合、使用者は、端部1037Bに中指86で力を加えることが容易にできるので、操作部材1030を容易に回動させることができる。このように、操作部材1030の場合、本体部材11の上下方向が反転された状態、即ち、使用者の左眼(向かって右側の眼)の前にハーフミラー56が配置された状態で使用された場合でも、使用者はピント調節を容易に行うことができる。 Suppose that the user places the half mirror 56 in front of the right eye (the left eye toward the left) as an example. In this case, the user arranges the second surface 22M of the second housing 1022 on the lower side so that the field of view of the left eye of the user is not blocked by the main body member 11, and the third surface of the third housing 1023 The main body member 11 is used in a state in which the surface 23M is disposed on the upper side (that is, a state in which the vertical direction is inverted with respect to FIG. 10). An end portion 1037 </ b> A of the second member 1037 protrudes downward with respect to the first member 36, and an end portion 1037 </ b> B protrudes upward with respect to the first member 36. In this case, the user can easily apply a force to the end portion 1037B with the middle finger 86, so that the operation member 1030 can be easily rotated. As described above, the operation member 1030 is used in a state in which the vertical direction of the main body member 11 is inverted, that is, in a state where the half mirror 56 is disposed in front of the user's left eye (right eye toward the user). Even in such a case, the user can easily adjust the focus.
 なお、本開示は上記の実施形態及び変形例に限定されず、様々な変形が可能である。上記のHMD101において、画像ユニット7を左右方向に移動させることによってピント調節が行われてもよい。具体的には次の通りである。画像ユニット7が左右方向に移動可能に保持されていてもよい。画像ユニット7の前側の面に突出部が設けられていてもよい。調節機構4のカム溝42に、画像ユニット7の突出部が後方から嵌っていてもよい。操作部材3、30及び調節機構4が回動した場合、画像ユニット7が左右方向に移動してもよい。又、画像ユニット7及びレンズユニット6の両方を左右方向に移動させることによって、ピント調節が行われてもよい。 In addition, this indication is not limited to said embodiment and modification, Various deformation | transformation are possible. In the HMD 101 described above, focus adjustment may be performed by moving the image unit 7 in the left-right direction. Specifically, it is as follows. The image unit 7 may be held so as to be movable in the left-right direction. A protrusion may be provided on the front surface of the image unit 7. The protruding portion of the image unit 7 may be fitted into the cam groove 42 of the adjustment mechanism 4 from the rear. When the operation members 3 and 30 and the adjustment mechanism 4 rotate, the image unit 7 may move in the left-right direction. Further, focus adjustment may be performed by moving both the image unit 7 and the lens unit 6 in the left-right direction.
 筐体12は、レンズユニット6及び画像ユニット7のうち一部のみを覆っていてもよい。操作部材3の円錐台形状の側面と、前後方向のとのなす角度θは、40度よりも大きくてもよい。操作部材3の形状は、円錐台形状以外の形状であってもよい。例えば操作部材3は、角錐台形状であってもよいし、円柱又は角柱であってもよい。操作部材3の回動可能な角度φは、120度より大きくてもよい。操作部材3の前後方向の長さLh(高さ)は、3mm未満であってもよい。筐体12の第1表面21Mと第2表面22Mとが接続する部分、及び、第1表面21Mと第3表面23Mとが接続する部分は、角張っていてもよい。第2表面22Mと第3表面23Mとの間の距離は均一であってもよい。即ち、第2表面22Mと第3表面23Mとは平行であってもよい。筐体12は、左右方向を軸線方向とする略円筒状であってもよい。 The housing 12 may cover only a part of the lens unit 6 and the image unit 7. An angle θ between the side surface of the truncated cone shape of the operation member 3 and the front-rear direction may be larger than 40 degrees. The shape of the operation member 3 may be a shape other than the truncated cone shape. For example, the operation member 3 may have a truncated pyramid shape, or may be a cylinder or a prism. The rotatable angle φ of the operation member 3 may be greater than 120 degrees. The length Lh (height) of the operation member 3 in the front-rear direction may be less than 3 mm. The portion where the first surface 21M and the second surface 22M of the housing 12 are connected and the portion where the first surface 21M and the third surface 23M are connected may be angular. The distance between the second surface 22M and the third surface 23M may be uniform. That is, the second surface 22M and the third surface 23M may be parallel. The housing 12 may be substantially cylindrical with the left-right direction as the axial direction.
 第1筐体1021の左端21Cは、上下方向両端部から上下方向中心に向けて、右方に凹んでいた。ここで、凹んだ部分に透明の部材が設けられていてもよい。この場合、第2延出部22Aの左端22C及び第3延出部1023Aの左端23Cの左右方向の位置と、透明の部材の左端の左右方向の位置とが同一であってもよい。 The left end 21C of the first housing 1021 was recessed rightward from the both ends in the vertical direction toward the center in the vertical direction. Here, a transparent member may be provided in the recessed portion. In this case, the left-right position of the left end 22C of the second extension part 22A and the left end 23C of the third extension part 1023A may be the same as the left-right position of the left end of the transparent member.
 上記において、HMD101は装着具8及び接続具9を備えず、本体部材11のみの構成であってもよい。本体部材11は、眼鏡等に直接固定されてもよい。また、HMD101は、装着具8を備えず、接続具9及び本体部材11で構成されてもよい。 In the above description, the HMD 101 may be configured only with the main body member 11 without including the mounting tool 8 and the connection tool 9. The body member 11 may be directly fixed to glasses or the like. Further, the HMD 101 may be configured by the connection tool 9 and the main body member 11 without including the mounting tool 8.
 上記において、操作部材1030の第2部材1037は、第1部材36の前端面36Aの中心から1方向に延びる棒状の部材であってもよい。又、第2部材1037は、第1部材36の前端面36Aの中心から3以上の方向に延びる複数の棒状の部材であってもよい。第2部材1037の延びる方向は、前後方向と直交する方向に対して傾斜していてもよい。操作部材1030の第2部材1037は、第1部材36の側面から突出してもよい。 In the above, the second member 1037 of the operation member 1030 may be a rod-shaped member extending in one direction from the center of the front end surface 36A of the first member 36. Further, the second member 1037 may be a plurality of rod-like members extending in three or more directions from the center of the front end surface 36A of the first member 36. The extending direction of the second member 1037 may be inclined with respect to the direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction. The second member 1037 of the operation member 1030 may protrude from the side surface of the first member 36.
<付記>
 本開示は、以下の観点も有する。
<Appendix>
The present disclosure also has the following viewpoints.
 従来、ピント調整を行うことが可能なヘッドマウントディスプレイが知られている。例えば、従来のHMDは、接眼光学系と、液晶表示装置と、制御基板と、接続部材とを備える。接眼光学系、液晶表示装置、および制御基板は、光軸方向に沿って設けられる。液晶表示装置は、接眼光学系と制御基板との間に設けられ、使用者に視認させる画像の光を接眼光学系に向けて出射する。液晶表示装置は、接眼光学系と制御基板に対して相対移動可能である。制御基板は液晶表示装置の制御を司る。接続部材は、導線等の湾曲可能な部材であり、制御基板と液晶表示装置とを電気的に接続する。液晶表示装置が、接眼光学系に対して相対移動することで、液晶表示装置と接眼光学系との相対位置は変わる。これにより、ヘッドマウントディスプレイはピント調整を行う。 Conventionally, a head-mounted display capable of adjusting the focus is known. For example, a conventional HMD includes an eyepiece optical system, a liquid crystal display device, a control board, and a connection member. The eyepiece optical system, the liquid crystal display device, and the control board are provided along the optical axis direction. The liquid crystal display device is provided between the eyepiece optical system and the control board, and emits light of an image to be visually recognized by the user toward the eyepiece optical system. The liquid crystal display device is movable relative to the eyepiece optical system and the control board. The control board controls the liquid crystal display device. The connecting member is a bendable member such as a conductive wire, and electrically connects the control board and the liquid crystal display device. The relative position of the liquid crystal display device and the eyepiece optical system changes as the liquid crystal display device moves relative to the eyepiece optical system. Thereby, the head mounted display performs focus adjustment.
 従来のHMDでは、液晶表示装置の相対移動に伴い、液晶表示装置に対する接続部材の配置位置が変わる。この場合、液晶表示装置は、接続部材の変形に起因し、相対移動を妨げる荷重を受けるおそれがある。結果、液晶表示装置が光軸方向に対して傾いてしまい、使用者に視認させる画像が変形してしまうおそれがあった。 In the conventional HMD, the arrangement position of the connection member with respect to the liquid crystal display device changes with the relative movement of the liquid crystal display device. In this case, the liquid crystal display device may be subjected to a load that hinders relative movement due to deformation of the connection member. As a result, the liquid crystal display device is inclined with respect to the optical axis direction, and there is a possibility that an image that is visually recognized by the user is deformed.
 本開示では、さらに、ピント調整を行う場合であっても、使用者に視認させる画像が変形しにくいヘッドマウントディスプレイも提供される。 The present disclosure further provides a head mounted display in which an image to be visually recognized by the user is not easily deformed even when focus adjustment is performed.
(1) 本開示のさらに他の側面は、
 画像光を生成可能な画像光生成部と、
 前記画像光生成部が生成した前記画像光を第1方向に導くレンズを複数枚有し、前記画像光生成部から前記第1方向に離間して設けられる接眼光学系と、
 前記接眼光学系から前記第1方向に離間し、且つ前記接眼光学系に対して前記画像光生成部と反対側に設けられ、複数の前記レンズが導く前記画像光を前記第1方向と異なる第2方向に反射する反射部材と、
 前記画像光生成部および前記反射部材を固定して支持し、且つ固定した前記画像光生成部と前記反射部材に対して前記接眼光学系を前記第1方向に沿って往復移動可能に支持する支持部材と、
 前記接眼光学系を前記第1方向に沿って往復移動させる移動機構とを備えたことを特徴とする画像表示装置である。
(1) Still another aspect of the present disclosure is as follows:
An image light generator capable of generating image light;
An eyepiece optical system that includes a plurality of lenses that guide the image light generated by the image light generation unit in a first direction, and is provided apart from the image light generation unit in the first direction;
The image light that is spaced apart from the eyepiece optical system in the first direction and that is provided on the opposite side of the image light generation unit with respect to the eyepiece optical system and that is guided by a plurality of lenses is different from the first direction. A reflective member that reflects in two directions;
The image light generating unit and the reflecting member are fixedly supported, and the eyepiece optical system is supported to be reciprocally movable along the first direction with respect to the fixed image light generating unit and the reflecting member. A member,
An image display device comprising: a moving mechanism that reciprocates the eyepiece optical system along the first direction.
 本開示によれば、画像表示装置は、ピント調整を行う場合、接眼光学系を、反射部材および画像光生成部に対して、第1方向に沿って相対移動させる。この場合、画像光生成部は、支持部材に固定されたままなので、第1方向に対して傾きにくい。よって、画像表示装置は、ピント調整を行う場合であっても、使用者に視認させる画像を変形しにくくできる。 According to the present disclosure, when performing the focus adjustment, the image display device moves the eyepiece optical system relative to the reflecting member and the image light generation unit along the first direction. In this case, the image light generator is not fixed to the first direction because it remains fixed to the support member. Therefore, the image display apparatus can make it difficult to deform the image that is visually recognized by the user even when the focus adjustment is performed.
(2)また、
 前記支持部材は、前記第1方向および前記第2方向と交差する第3方向に離間して設けられ、前記接眼光学系を前記第1方向に沿って案内する一対の案内部を備え、
 前記接眼光学系は、前記一対の案内部のそれぞれに沿って摺動する一対の摺動部を備えてもよい。
(2) Also,
The support member includes a pair of guide portions that are provided apart from each other in the third direction intersecting the first direction and the second direction, and guide the eyepiece optical system along the first direction.
The eyepiece optical system may include a pair of sliding portions that slide along each of the pair of guide portions.
 接眼光学系は、一対の案内部に沿って移動するので、往復移動し易く、第1方向に傾きにくい。よって画像表示装置は、ピント調整を行う場合に、使用者に視認させる画像をさらに変形しにくくできる。 Since the eyepiece optical system moves along the pair of guide portions, it is easy to reciprocate and hardly tilt in the first direction. Therefore, the image display apparatus can make it difficult to deform the image visually recognized by the user when performing the focus adjustment.
(3)また、
 前記支持部材は、前記第1方向および前記第2方向と交差する第3方向の中心を含む位置に設けられ、前記第1方向に沿って延びる第1溝部を有し、
 前記接眼光学系は、前記第3方向の中心を含む位置に設けられ、前記第1方向に沿って延び、前記第1溝部に係合可能な突出部を有してもよい。
(3) Also,
The support member includes a first groove portion provided at a position including a center in a third direction intersecting the first direction and the second direction, and extending along the first direction;
The eyepiece optical system may include a protrusion provided at a position including the center in the third direction, extending along the first direction, and engageable with the first groove.
 接眼光学系は、溝部に沿って移動するので、往復移動し易い。また、第1溝部と突出部とが第1方向に延びているので、接眼光学系は、第1方向に傾きにくい。よって画像表示装置は、ピント調整を行う場合に、使用者に視認させる画像をさらに変形しにくくできる Since the eyepiece optical system moves along the groove, it is easy to reciprocate. Moreover, since the 1st groove part and the protrusion part are extended in the 1st direction, an eyepiece optical system cannot tilt easily in the 1st direction. Therefore, the image display apparatus can further reduce the deformation of the image to be visually recognized by the user when performing the focus adjustment.
(4)また、
 前記支持部材は、
 前記反射部材を支持する第1支持部材と、
 前記画像光生成部および前記接眼光学系を支持する第2支持部材と、
 前記第1支持部材と前記第2支持部材とを固定する固定部とを備え、
 前記第1支持部材及び前記第2支持部材の一方は、他方に対して、前記反射部材が前記画像光を反射する方向側に配置され、
 前記固定部は、前記支持部材のうち前記反射する方向側に配置されてもよい。
(4) Also,
The support member is
A first support member that supports the reflective member;
A second support member that supports the image light generation unit and the eyepiece optical system;
A fixing portion for fixing the first support member and the second support member;
One of the first support member and the second support member is disposed on the direction side where the reflection member reflects the image light with respect to the other,
The fixing portion may be disposed on the reflecting direction side of the support member.
 支持部材のうち反射する方向側に配置される固定部は、画像表示装置の使用時において、使用者以外からは視認されにくい。よって、画像表示装置は外観の見栄えを良好にできる。 The fixed portion arranged on the reflecting direction side of the support member is difficult to be seen by anyone other than the user when using the image display device. Therefore, the image display device can improve the appearance of the appearance.
(5)また、
 前記一対の案内部のうち一方は、前記第1支持部材に設けられ、前記第1方向に沿って延びる軸部材を備え、
 他方は前記第1支持部材から前記第1方向と交差する方向に向かって突出し、前記第1方向に沿って延びる突出部を備え、
 前記一対の摺動部のうち一方は、前記軸部材が挿入される1又は複数の穴部を備え、
 他方は、前記突出部に嵌る溝部を備えていてもよい。
(5) Also,
One of the pair of guide portions includes a shaft member provided on the first support member and extending along the first direction,
The other protrudes from the first support member in a direction intersecting the first direction, and includes a protrusion extending along the first direction.
One of the pair of sliding portions includes one or a plurality of holes into which the shaft member is inserted,
The other may have a groove that fits into the protrusion.
 穴部に軸部材が挿入され、溝部に突出部が嵌められるだけで、接眼光学系は、第1方向に沿って往復移動可能となる。よって、画像表示装置は組立性を向上できる。 The eyepiece optical system can reciprocate along the first direction simply by inserting the shaft member into the hole and fitting the protrusion into the groove. Therefore, the image display device can improve assemblability.
(6)また、
 前記一対の摺動部のうち一方は、前記第1方向に離間して設けられる複数の前記穴部を備え、
 前記溝部は、前記第1方向において、前記複数の穴部の何れかの間となる位置に配置されてもよい。
(6) Also,
One of the pair of sliding portions includes a plurality of the hole portions spaced apart in the first direction,
The groove may be arranged at a position between any of the plurality of holes in the first direction.
 溝部は、接眼光学系が穴部の軸線回りに回転するのを安定して阻止できる。よって、画像表示装置、安定して接眼光学系を往復移動させることができる。 The groove can stably prevent the eyepiece optical system from rotating around the axis of the hole. Therefore, the image display device can stably move the eyepiece optical system back and forth.
(7)また、
 前記移動機構は、
 前記接眼光学系に設けられ、前記反射部材が前記画像光を反射する方向と反対方向に向かって突出する突出部と、
 前記突出部が前記反射する方向側から挿入されるカム溝を有し、前記支持部材に回動可能に設けられる回動部材とを備え、
 前記カム溝は前記回動部材の軸線を中心に渦巻き状に延び、
 前記カム溝の延設方向の一端側は、他端側よりも前記軸線から離間していてもよい。
(7) Also,
The moving mechanism is
A protrusion provided in the eyepiece optical system and protruding in a direction opposite to a direction in which the reflection member reflects the image light;
The protrusion has a cam groove that is inserted from the reflecting direction side, and a rotation member that is rotatably provided on the support member;
The cam groove extends spirally around the axis of the rotating member,
One end side in the extending direction of the cam groove may be further away from the axis than the other end side.
 回動部材が回動する場合、カム溝が突出部を第1方向に沿って往復移動させることで、接眼光学系は往復移動できる。使用者は、回動部材を回動させるだけで、接眼光学系を往復移動させることができる。よって、画像表示装置は、ピント調整の操作性を向上できる。 When the rotating member rotates, the eye groove optical system can reciprocate by the cam groove reciprocating the protrusion along the first direction. The user can reciprocate the eyepiece optical system simply by rotating the rotating member. Therefore, the image display apparatus can improve the operability of focus adjustment.
(8)また、
 前記カム溝は、前記延設方向の前記一端および前記軸線を含む平面と、前記他端および前記軸線を含む平面とがなす角度のうち、前記カム溝側の角度が90度以上、且つ180度以下となるように、形成されていてもよい。
(8) Also,
The cam groove has an angle on the cam groove side of 90 degrees or more and 180 degrees among angles formed by the plane including the one end and the axis in the extending direction and the plane including the other end and the axis. You may form so that it may become the following.
 接眼光学系が、可動範囲のうち第1方向の一端から他端へ移動する場合、回動部材は90度以上、且つ180度以下の範囲で回転する。回動部材が90度以上回動できることで、回動部材の単位回動量あたりに接眼光学系が移動する移動量は、抑制される。従って、使用者は回動部材を回動して接眼光学系の移動量の微調整ができる。また、回動部材は180度よりも大きくは回動しない。従って、使用者は、回動部材を回動させる場合に、指でつまんだ回動部材を持ち変える必要がない。よって、HMDは、ピント調整の操作性をさらに向上できる。 When the eyepiece optical system moves from one end to the other end in the first direction in the movable range, the rotating member rotates in the range of 90 degrees or more and 180 degrees or less. Since the rotation member can be rotated 90 degrees or more, the movement amount of the eyepiece optical system that moves per unit rotation amount of the rotation member is suppressed. Therefore, the user can finely adjust the moving amount of the eyepiece optical system by rotating the rotating member. Further, the rotating member does not rotate more than 180 degrees. Therefore, the user does not need to change the rotating member pinched with the finger when rotating the rotating member. Therefore, the HMD can further improve the focus adjustment operability.
(9)また、
 前記反射部材は、前記接眼光学系側の表面に、前記画像光を反射可能な第1領域を備え、
 前記第1領域は、前記反射部材に最も接近する位置に移動した前記接眼光学系が、前記表面に前記画像光を照射可能な第2領域を含んでもよい。
(9) Also,
The reflecting member includes a first region capable of reflecting the image light on a surface on the eyepiece optical system side,
The first region may include a second region in which the eyepiece optical system moved to a position closest to the reflecting member can irradiate the surface with the image light.
 接眼光学系が反射部材の表面を照射可能な領域は、接眼光学系が反射部材に最も接近する場合に、最も大きくなる。第1領域が第2領域を含むことで、接眼光学系の位置に関わらず、表面に照射される画像光が第1領域から外れることはない。よって、画像表示装置は、接眼光学系の位置に関わらず、安定して画像光の画像を使用者に視認させることができる。 The region where the eyepiece optical system can irradiate the surface of the reflecting member is the largest when the eyepiece optical system is closest to the reflecting member. Since the first region includes the second region, the image light irradiated on the surface does not deviate from the first region regardless of the position of the eyepiece optical system. Therefore, the image display device can make the user visually recognize the image light image stably regardless of the position of the eyepiece optical system.
 (10)また、
 前記画像光生成部と前記接眼光学系とは、前記画像光生成部と前記接眼光学系との間の前記第1方向の前記相対距離が最も近接した第1状態と、前記相対距離が最も離間した第2状態との間で移動可能に前記筐体に保持され、
 前記画像光生成部の前記第1方向の一方側の端部は、前記第1状態において、前記接眼光学系の前記第1方向の他方側の端部よりも、前記第1方向の前記一方側に配置され、
 前記接眼光学系は、前記第1状態において、前記画像光生成部の前記第1方向の前記一方側の端部よりも前記第1方向の前記他方側に配置される前記接眼光学系の重複部分のうち、前記接眼光学系の光軸に最も近接する部分に、前記光軸と交差する方向に突出する少なくとも1つの追加突出部を有し、
 前記画像光生成部は、前記第1状態において、前記接眼光学系の前記第1方向の前記他方側の端部よりも前記第1方向の前記一方側に配置される前記接眼光学系の重複部分のうち、前記光軸に最も近接する部分に、前記少なくとも1つの追加突出部が内側から嵌まる少なくとも1つの追加溝部を有してもよい。
(10) Also,
The image light generation unit and the eyepiece optical system are separated from the first state in which the relative distance in the first direction between the image light generation unit and the eyepiece optical system is closest to each other, and the relative distance is the farthest. Held in the housing movably between the second state,
The one end portion in the first direction of the image light generation unit is the one side in the first direction in the first state than the other end portion in the first direction of the eyepiece optical system. Placed in
In the first state, the eyepiece optical system is an overlapping portion of the eyepiece optical system disposed on the other side in the first direction with respect to the end portion on the one side in the first direction of the image light generation unit. Of the eyepiece optical system, the portion closest to the optical axis of the eyepiece optical system has at least one additional protrusion protruding in the direction intersecting the optical axis,
In the first state, the image light generation unit is an overlapping portion of the eyepiece optical system that is disposed on the one side in the first direction with respect to an end portion on the other side in the first direction of the eyepiece optical system. Of these, at least one additional groove portion into which the at least one additional protrusion fits from the inside may be provided in a portion closest to the optical axis.
 この場合、画像光生成部と接眼光学系との第1方向の重複部分で、少なくとも1つの追加突出部が少なくとも1つの追加溝部に嵌ることによって、第3方向と交差する方向の位置関係が固定される。従って、操作部材に対する操作に応じて画像光生成部及び接眼光学系の少なくとも一方が第1方向に移動したときに、画像光生成部及び接眼光学系が光軸と交差する方向に移動することを抑制できる。なお、少なくとも1つの追加突出部及び少なくとも1つの追加溝部は、光軸に近接する位置に設けられるので、画像光生成部及び接眼光学系が光軸と交差する方向に移動することを適切に抑制できる。 In this case, the positional relationship in the direction intersecting with the third direction is fixed by fitting at least one additional protrusion in at least one additional groove at the overlapping portion in the first direction between the image light generation unit and the eyepiece optical system. Is done. Therefore, when at least one of the image light generation unit and the eyepiece optical system moves in the first direction according to an operation on the operation member, the image light generation unit and the eyepiece optical system move in a direction intersecting the optical axis. Can be suppressed. The at least one additional protrusion and the at least one additional groove are provided at positions close to the optical axis, so that the image light generation unit and the eyepiece optical system are appropriately prevented from moving in a direction intersecting the optical axis. it can.
 (11)また、
 前記少なくとも1つの追加突出部は、前記接眼光学系の重複部分の前記光軸と直交する方向の一方側と他方側とのそれぞれに設けられた一対の第3突出部を有し、
 前記少なくとも1つの追加溝部は、画像光生成部の重複部分の前記光軸と直交する方向の一方側と他方側とのそれぞれに設けられた一対の追加溝部を有してもよい。
(11) Also,
The at least one additional protrusion has a pair of third protrusions provided on each of one side and the other side in a direction orthogonal to the optical axis of the overlapping portion of the eyepiece optical system,
The at least one additional groove may include a pair of additional grooves provided on one side and the other side of the overlapping portion of the image light generation unit in a direction orthogonal to the optical axis.
 この場合、画像光生成部及び接眼光学系は、それぞれの第1方向の重複部分の第1方向と直交する方向の両側で、第3方向と交差する方向の位置関係が固定される。従って、操作部材に対する操作に応じて画像光生成部及び接眼光学系の少なくとも一方が第1方向に移動したときに、画像光生成部及び接眼光学系が光軸と交差する方向に移動することを適切に抑制できる。 In this case, in the image light generation unit and the eyepiece optical system, the positional relationship in the direction intersecting the third direction is fixed on both sides of the overlapping portion in the first direction in the direction orthogonal to the first direction. Therefore, when at least one of the image light generation unit and the eyepiece optical system moves in the first direction according to an operation on the operation member, the image light generation unit and the eyepiece optical system move in a direction intersecting the optical axis. It can be suppressed appropriately.
 (12)また、
 前記少なくとも1つの追加突出部は、前記接眼光学系の前記第2方向の中心を含む位置に設けられ、
 前記少なくとも1つの追加溝部は、前記画像光生成部の前記第2方向の中心を含む位置に設けられてもよい。
(12) Also,
The at least one additional protrusion is provided at a position including the center in the second direction of the eyepiece optical system,
The at least one additional groove may be provided at a position including the center in the second direction of the image light generation unit.
 この場合、操作部材に対する操作に応じて画像光生成部及び接眼光学系の少なくとも一方が第1方向に移動したときに、画像光生成部及び接眼光学系が第2方向に移動することを適切に抑制できる。 In this case, when at least one of the image light generation unit and the eyepiece optical system moves in the first direction in accordance with an operation on the operation member, it is appropriate that the image light generation unit and the eyepiece optical system move in the second direction. Can be suppressed.
 (13)本開示のさらに他の側面は、
 上記した(1)~(12)の何れかに記載の画像表示装置と、
 前記第1方向に延びる第1部分、及び、前記第1部分の両側から前記第2方向の前記一方側に延びる一対の第2部分を有する装着具と、
 前記装着具の前記第1部分に接続され、前記画像表示装置が接続された接続具と、を備えたことを特徴とするヘッドマウントディスプレイである。
(13) Still another aspect of the present disclosure is as follows:
The image display device according to any one of the above (1) to (12);
A wearing tool having a first portion extending in the first direction and a pair of second portions extending from both sides of the first portion to the one side in the second direction;
A head mounted display comprising: a connection tool connected to the first portion of the wearing tool and connected to the image display device.
 (14)また、
 前記第一部分は、前記第2方向の前記他方側に向けて凸状に湾曲し、
 前記接続具は、前記第1部分から前記第3方向に沿って延び、
 前記接続具の一端が、前記装着具に接続され、
 前記接続具の他端が、に前記画像表示装置が接続されてもよい。
(14) Also,
The first portion is curved in a convex shape toward the other side in the second direction,
The connector extends from the first portion along the third direction;
One end of the connection tool is connected to the wearing tool,
The image display device may be connected to the other end of the connector.
1,101 HMD
3    :操作部材
4    :調節機構
5    :ホルダ
6    :レンズユニット
7    :画像ユニット
8    :装着具
8A   :第1部分
8B   :第2部分
8C   :第2部分
9    :接続具
10    筐体
20    第1筐体
12   :筐体
21C  :左端
21M  :第1表面
22C  :左端
22M  :第2表面
23C  :左端
23M  :第3表面
30    第2筐体
34A   ネジ
35    一対の案内部
37    軸部材
39    突出部
42   :カム溝
56   :ハーフミラー
59   :偏向ユニット
63   :レンズ
64   :突出部
65   :突出部
70    アジャスタ
76    カム溝
77   :光軸
78,79 平面
80    ハーフミラー
89    反射面
84    最大照射領域
120   液晶ユニット
130   接眼光学系
136   突出部
144   穴部
145   溝部
146   摺動部
212  :湾曲部分
213  :湾曲部分
242  :溝部
621C :突出部
621D :突出部
712  :突出部
713A :溝部
714A :溝部
1030   :操作部材
1036   :第1部材
1037   :第2部材
X     軸線
θ    :角度
φ    :角度
1,101 HMD
3: Operation member 4: Adjustment mechanism 5: Holder 6: Lens unit 7: Image unit 8: Mounting tool 8A: 1st part 8B: 2nd part 8C: 2nd part 9: Connection tool 10 Case 20 1st case 12: Housing 21C: Left end 21M: First surface 22C: Left end 22M: Second surface 23C: Left end 23M: Third surface 30 Second housing 34A Screw 35 A pair of guide portions 37 Shaft member 39 Projecting portion 42: Cam groove 56: Half mirror 59: Deflection unit 63: Lens 64: Protruding portion 65: Protruding portion 70 Adjuster 76 Cam groove 77: Optical axis 78, 79 Plane 80 Half mirror 89 Reflecting surface 84 Maximum irradiation area 120 Liquid crystal unit 130 Eyepiece optical system 136 Protruding portion 144 Hole portion 145 Groove portion 146 Sliding portion 212: Curved portion 2 3: curved portion 242: groove 621C: protrusion 621D: protrusion 712: protrusion 713A: groove 714A: groove 1030: operating member 1036: first member 1037: second member X axis theta: angle phi: angle

Claims (16)

  1.  画像光を生成可能な画像ユニットと、
     複数のレンズを有し、前記画像ユニットに対して第1方向の一方側に配置され、その光軸が前記第1方向に延びるレンズユニットと、
     前記画像ユニット及び前記レンズユニットの少なくとも一部を覆う筐体と、
     前記筐体のうち、前記レンズユニットに対して前記第1方向の前記一方側に設けられた部材であって、前記レンズユニットによって導かれた前記画像光を、前記第1方向と直交する第2方向の一方側に偏向させることが可能な偏向部材と、
     前記画像ユニット及び前記レンズユニットの少なくとも一方の前記第2方向の前記一方側に設けられた第1係合部材と、
     前記画像ユニット及び前記レンズユニットの少なくとも一方の前記第2方向の他方側に設けられた第2係合部材と、
     前記筐体のうち、前記第2方向の前記一方側の部分の前記筐体内側面に設けられた部材であって、前記第1係合部材に係合して前記第1方向に移動可能に支持する第3係合部材と、
     前記第2係合部材に係合する部材であって、前記画像ユニットと前記レンズユニットとの前記第1方向の相対距離を変更可能な第4係合部材を有し、前記第2係合部材の前記第2方向の前記他方側に設けられた調節機構と、
     前記筐体のうち、前記第2方向の前記他方側に少なくとも設けられた部材であって、前記調節機構に接続され、前記調節機構を使用者が操作可能な操作部材と
    を備えたことを特徴とする画像表示装置。
    An image unit capable of generating image light;
    A lens unit having a plurality of lenses, disposed on one side in the first direction with respect to the image unit, and having an optical axis extending in the first direction;
    A housing covering at least a part of the image unit and the lens unit;
    Of the housing, a member provided on the one side in the first direction with respect to the lens unit, wherein the image light guided by the lens unit is secondly orthogonal to the first direction. A deflecting member capable of deflecting to one side of the direction;
    A first engagement member provided on the one side in the second direction of at least one of the image unit and the lens unit;
    A second engagement member provided on the other side in the second direction of at least one of the image unit and the lens unit;
    Of the casing, a member provided on the inner side surface of the one side portion in the second direction, which is engaged with the first engaging member and supported so as to be movable in the first direction. A third engaging member that
    A second engagement member that engages with the second engagement member, the fourth engagement member being capable of changing a relative distance between the image unit and the lens unit in the first direction; An adjustment mechanism provided on the other side of the second direction of
    A member provided at least on the other side of the housing in the second direction, the operation member being connected to the adjustment mechanism and capable of operating the adjustment mechanism by a user. An image display device.
  2.  前記筐体は、前記画像ユニットと前記偏向部材との間の距離を固定して保持し、
     前記第1係合部材及び前記第2係合部材は、前記レンズユニットに設けられ、前記画像ユニットに設けられないことを特徴とする請求項1に記載の画像表示装置。
    The housing holds a fixed distance between the image unit and the deflection member,
    The image display apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the first engagement member and the second engagement member are provided in the lens unit and are not provided in the image unit.
  3.  前記第1係合部材は、前記第2方向の前記一方側に突出する第1突出部を有することを特徴とする請求項1に記載の画像表示装置。 2. The image display device according to claim 1, wherein the first engaging member has a first projecting portion projecting to the one side in the second direction.
  4.  前記第1突出部の前記第1方向の長さは、前記第1方向及び前記第2方向と直交する第3方向の長さよりも長いことを特徴とする請求項3に記載の画像表示装置。 4. The image display device according to claim 3, wherein a length of the first projecting portion in the first direction is longer than a length in a third direction orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction.
  5.  前記第3係合部材は、前記第1方向に延び且つ前記第1突出部が嵌る第1溝部を有することを特徴とする請求項3に記載の画像表示装置。 4. The image display device according to claim 3, wherein the third engagement member has a first groove portion extending in the first direction and into which the first protrusion is fitted.
  6.  前記第3係合部材は、前記第1方向に延び且つ前記第1突出部に挿通される軸部材を有することを特徴とする請求項3に記載の画像表示装置。 4. The image display device according to claim 3, wherein the third engagement member includes a shaft member that extends in the first direction and is inserted through the first protrusion.
  7.  前記第1突出部は、前記画像ユニット及び前記レンズユニットの少なくとも一方の前記第2方向の前記一方側のうち、前記第3方向の中心を含む位置に設けられ、
     前記第2係合部材は、前記画像ユニット及び前記レンズユニットの少なくとも一方の前記第2方向の前記他方側のうち、前記第3方向の中心を含む位置に設けられ、
     前記第3係合部材は、前記筐体の前記第2方向の前記一方側の部分の前記筐体内側面のうち、前記第3方向の中心を含む位置に設けられることを特徴とする請求項3に記載の画像表示装置。
    The first projecting portion is provided at a position including the center in the third direction among the one side in the second direction of at least one of the image unit and the lens unit,
    The second engagement member is provided at a position including a center in the third direction among the other side in the second direction of at least one of the image unit and the lens unit,
    The said 3rd engagement member is provided in the position containing the center of the said 3rd direction among the inner surface of the said housing | casing of the said one side part of the said 2nd direction of the said housing | casing. The image display device described in 1.
  8.  前記第1突出部は、前記画像ユニット及び前記レンズユニットの少なくとも一方の前記第2方向の前記一方側のうち、前記第3方向に離間して設けられる2つの摺動部を有し、
     前記第3係合部材は、前記2つの摺動部に対応して2つ設けられ、
     前記第3係合部材は、前記筐体の前記第2方向の前記一方側の部分の前記筐体内側面のうち、前記第3方向の中心を含む位置に設けられることを特徴とする請求項3に記載の画像表示装置。
    The first protrusion has two sliding portions provided apart from each other in the third direction among the one side in the second direction of at least one of the image unit and the lens unit,
    Two third engagement members are provided corresponding to the two sliding portions,
    The said 3rd engagement member is provided in the position containing the center of the said 3rd direction among the inner surface of the said housing | casing of the said one side part of the said 2nd direction of the said housing | casing. The image display device described in 1.
  9.  前記第2係合部材は、前記画像ユニット及び前記レンズユニットの少なくとも一方の前記第2方向の前記他方側に突出する第2突出部を有し、
     前記第4係合部材は、前記第2突出部が嵌る渦巻き状の第2溝部を有することを特徴とする請求項1から8の何れかに記載の画像表示装置。
    The second engaging member has a second projecting portion projecting to the other side in the second direction of at least one of the image unit and the lens unit,
    The image display device according to claim 1, wherein the fourth engagement member has a spiral second groove portion into which the second protrusion is fitted.
  10.  前記画像ユニットと前記レンズユニットとは、前記画像ユニットと前記レンズユニットとの間の前記第1方向の前記相対距離が最も近接した第1状態と、前記相対距離が最も離間した第2状態との間で移動可能に前記筐体に保持され、
     前記画像ユニットの前記第1方向の前記一方側の端部は、前記第1状態において、前記レンズユニットの前記第1方向の前記他方側の端部よりも、前記第1方向の前記一方側に配置され、
     前記レンズユニットは、前記第1状態において、前記画像ユニットの前記第1方向の前記一方側の端部よりも前記第1方向の前記他方側に配置されるレンズユニット重複部分のうち、前記光軸に最も近接する部分に、前記光軸と交差する方向に突出する少なくとも1つの第3突出部を有し、
     前記画像ユニットは、前記第1状態において、前記レンズユニットの前記第1方向の前記他方側の端部よりも前記第1方向の前記一方側に配置される画像ユニット重複部分のうち、前記光軸に最も近接する部分に、前記少なくとも1つの第3突出部が内側から嵌まる少なくとも1つの第3溝部を有することを特徴とする請求項1から8の何れかに記載の画像表示装置。
    The image unit and the lens unit include a first state in which the relative distance in the first direction between the image unit and the lens unit is the closest, and a second state in which the relative distance is the most separated. Held in the housing movably between,
    The one end of the image unit in the first direction is closer to the one side in the first direction than the other end of the lens unit in the first direction in the first state. Arranged,
    In the first state, the lens unit has the optical axis in the overlapping portion of the lens unit disposed on the other side in the first direction with respect to the end on the one side in the first direction of the image unit. At least one third projecting portion projecting in a direction intersecting the optical axis,
    In the first state, the image unit has the optical axis in the overlapping portion of the image unit arranged on the one side in the first direction with respect to the end on the other side in the first direction of the lens unit. 9. The image display device according to claim 1, further comprising at least one third groove portion into which the at least one third projecting portion is fitted from an inner side in a portion closest to the image display device.
  11.  前記少なくとも1つの第3突出部は、前記レンズユニット重複部分の前記光軸と直交する方向の一方側と他方側とのそれぞれに設けられた一対の第3突出部を有し、
     前記少なくとも1つの第3溝部は、前記画像ユニット重複部分の前記光軸と直交する方向の一方側と他方側とのそれぞれに設けられた一対の第3溝部を有することを特徴とする請求項10に記載の画像表示装置。
    The at least one third protrusion has a pair of third protrusions provided on each of one side and the other side of the lens unit overlapping portion in a direction orthogonal to the optical axis,
    The said at least 1 3rd groove part has a pair of 3rd groove part provided in each of the one side and the other side of the direction orthogonal to the said optical axis of the said image unit duplication part, It is characterized by the above-mentioned. The image display device described in 1.
  12.  前記少なくとも1つの第3突出部は、前記レンズユニットの前記第2方向の中心を含む位置に設けられ、
     前記少なくとも1つの第3溝部は、前記画像ユニットの前記第2方向の中心を含む位置に設けられたことを特徴とする請求項10に記載の画像表示装置。
    The at least one third protrusion is provided at a position including the center of the lens unit in the second direction,
    The image display device according to claim 10, wherein the at least one third groove portion is provided at a position including a center of the image unit in the second direction.
  13.  前記筐体は、前記第2方向の前記一方側に第1筐体を有し、前記第2方向の前記他方側に第2筐体を有し、
     前記画像ユニット及び前記レンズユニットは前記第1筐体に保持され、前記操作部材は前記第2筐体に保持されることを特徴とする請求項1から8の何れかに記載の画像表示装置。
    The housing has a first housing on the one side in the second direction, and a second housing on the other side in the second direction,
    The image display apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the image unit and the lens unit are held by the first casing, and the operation member is held by the second casing.
  14.  前記画像ユニットのうち前記第2方向の前記他方側に、同一平面上に配置される複数の端部を含む平面部を備えたことを特徴とする請求項1から8の何れかに記載の画像表示装置。 The image according to any one of claims 1 to 8, further comprising a plane portion including a plurality of end portions arranged on the same plane on the other side of the second direction in the image unit. Display device.
  15.  請求項1から14の何れかに記載の前記画像表示装置と、
     前記第1方向に延びる第1部分、及び、前記第1部分の両側から前記第2方向の前記一方側に延びる一対の第2部分を有する装着具と、
     前記装着具の前記第1部分に接続され、前記画像表示装置が接続された接続具と、
    を備えたことを特徴とするヘッドマウントディスプレイ。
    The image display device according to any one of claims 1 to 14,
    A wearing tool having a first portion extending in the first direction and a pair of second portions extending from both sides of the first portion to the one side in the second direction;
    A connection tool connected to the first part of the wearing tool and connected to the image display device;
    A head-mounted display characterized by comprising:
  16.  前記第一部分は、前記第2方向の前記他方側に向けて凸状に湾曲し、
     前記接続具は、前記第1部分から前記第3方向に沿って延び、
     前記接続具の一端が、前記装着具に接続され、
     前記接続具の他端が、に前記画像表示装置が接続される、
    請求項15に記載のヘッドマウントディスプレイ。
    The first portion is curved in a convex shape toward the other side in the second direction,
    The connector extends from the first portion along the third direction;
    One end of the connection tool is connected to the wearing tool,
    The other end of the connection tool is connected to the image display device,
    The head mounted display according to claim 15.
PCT/JP2014/072544 2013-08-30 2014-08-28 Image display device, and head-mounted display WO2015030100A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2013179762A JP6032159B2 (en) 2013-08-30 2013-08-30 Head mounted display
JP2013-179762 2013-08-30
JP2014-154957 2014-07-30
JP2014154957A JP6248854B2 (en) 2014-07-30 2014-07-30 Head mounted display

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2015030100A1 true WO2015030100A1 (en) 2015-03-05

Family

ID=52586649

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2014/072544 WO2015030100A1 (en) 2013-08-30 2014-08-28 Image display device, and head-mounted display

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2015030100A1 (en)

Cited By (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104865705A (en) * 2015-05-04 2015-08-26 上海交通大学 Reinforced realistic headwear equipment based intelligent mobile equipment
CN104898279A (en) * 2015-04-23 2015-09-09 北京小鸟看看科技有限公司 Transmission mechanism, head-mounted display and diopter adjustment method
WO2016017455A1 (en) * 2014-07-30 2016-02-04 ブラザー工業株式会社 Image display device and deflection unit
JP2017049762A (en) * 2015-09-01 2017-03-09 株式会社東芝 System and method
JP2017123594A (en) * 2016-01-08 2017-07-13 ブラザー工業株式会社 Head-mounted display
WO2018152850A1 (en) * 2017-02-27 2018-08-30 深圳市柔宇科技有限公司 Head-mounted display device and adjustment method therefor
EP3280134A4 (en) * 2015-03-31 2018-12-05 Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Head-mounted display and image display device
EP3435660A4 (en) * 2016-03-25 2019-10-30 Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Head-mounted display

Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH1184474A (en) * 1997-09-08 1999-03-26 Olympus Optical Co Ltd Camera
JPH11109447A (en) * 1997-10-08 1999-04-23 Minolta Co Ltd Zoom finder
JP2000214371A (en) * 1999-01-26 2000-08-04 Olympus Optical Co Ltd Binoculars provided with visibility adjusting function
JP2002156572A (en) * 2000-11-21 2002-05-31 Ricoh Co Ltd Lens linking mechanism and lens unit
JP2002162597A (en) * 2000-11-22 2002-06-07 Toshiba Corp Wearable display device
JP2004286833A (en) * 2003-03-19 2004-10-14 Nikon Corp Head-mounted display
JP2005284130A (en) * 2004-03-30 2005-10-13 Thk Co Ltd Lens movement mechanism
JP2013044896A (en) * 2011-08-23 2013-03-04 Brother Ind Ltd Head-mounted display
JP2013044828A (en) * 2011-08-23 2013-03-04 Brother Ind Ltd Head-mounted display

Patent Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH1184474A (en) * 1997-09-08 1999-03-26 Olympus Optical Co Ltd Camera
JPH11109447A (en) * 1997-10-08 1999-04-23 Minolta Co Ltd Zoom finder
JP2000214371A (en) * 1999-01-26 2000-08-04 Olympus Optical Co Ltd Binoculars provided with visibility adjusting function
JP2002156572A (en) * 2000-11-21 2002-05-31 Ricoh Co Ltd Lens linking mechanism and lens unit
JP2002162597A (en) * 2000-11-22 2002-06-07 Toshiba Corp Wearable display device
JP2004286833A (en) * 2003-03-19 2004-10-14 Nikon Corp Head-mounted display
JP2005284130A (en) * 2004-03-30 2005-10-13 Thk Co Ltd Lens movement mechanism
JP2013044896A (en) * 2011-08-23 2013-03-04 Brother Ind Ltd Head-mounted display
JP2013044828A (en) * 2011-08-23 2013-03-04 Brother Ind Ltd Head-mounted display

Cited By (18)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2016017455A1 (en) * 2014-07-30 2016-02-04 ブラザー工業株式会社 Image display device and deflection unit
JP2016031505A (en) * 2014-07-30 2016-03-07 ブラザー工業株式会社 Image display device, head-mounted display, and deflection unit
EP3280134A4 (en) * 2015-03-31 2018-12-05 Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Head-mounted display and image display device
US10168536B2 (en) 2015-03-31 2019-01-01 Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Head-mounted display and image display device
CN104898279A (en) * 2015-04-23 2015-09-09 北京小鸟看看科技有限公司 Transmission mechanism, head-mounted display and diopter adjustment method
CN104865705A (en) * 2015-05-04 2015-08-26 上海交通大学 Reinforced realistic headwear equipment based intelligent mobile equipment
JP2017049762A (en) * 2015-09-01 2017-03-09 株式会社東芝 System and method
US10671849B2 (en) 2015-09-01 2020-06-02 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba System and method for sensor based visual adjustments
US10679059B2 (en) 2015-09-01 2020-06-09 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba System and method for visual image adjustment
US10685232B2 (en) 2015-09-01 2020-06-16 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Wearable device for displaying checklist of a work
US10682405B2 (en) 2015-09-01 2020-06-16 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba System and method and device for adjusting image positioning
US11002975B2 (en) 2015-09-01 2021-05-11 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba System and method for image generation based on a display-attachable wearable device
US11428944B2 (en) 2015-09-01 2022-08-30 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Wearable device and method for visual image adjustment
US11789279B2 (en) 2015-09-01 2023-10-17 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba System and method for virtual image adjustment
WO2017119425A1 (en) * 2016-01-08 2017-07-13 ブラザー工業株式会社 Head-mounted display
JP2017123594A (en) * 2016-01-08 2017-07-13 ブラザー工業株式会社 Head-mounted display
EP3435660A4 (en) * 2016-03-25 2019-10-30 Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Head-mounted display
WO2018152850A1 (en) * 2017-02-27 2018-08-30 深圳市柔宇科技有限公司 Head-mounted display device and adjustment method therefor

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2015030099A1 (en) Image display device, and head-mounted display
WO2015030100A1 (en) Image display device, and head-mounted display
JP6358248B2 (en) Display device
JP6547622B2 (en) Image display device and display device
WO2015008530A1 (en) Display device
JP6528498B2 (en) Head mounted display
US10379364B2 (en) Head-mounted display
EP3280134A1 (en) Head-mounted display and image display device
JP6281456B2 (en) Head mounted display
JP2013210587A (en) Head-mounted display
JP6206366B2 (en) Head mounted display
JP6032159B2 (en) Head mounted display
JP6248853B2 (en) Head mounted display
JP6455449B2 (en) Head mounted display
JP6248854B2 (en) Head mounted display
JP6493229B2 (en) Head mounted display
JP6115528B2 (en) Image display device, head mounted display, and deflection unit
JP6164231B2 (en) Head mounted display and image display device
JP6115532B2 (en) Image display device
JP6146422B2 (en) Image display device and head mounted display
JP6418193B2 (en) Head mounted display
WO2018061402A1 (en) Head-mounted display

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 14840145

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 14840145

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1